JP5033904B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and more specifically, variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a variable display means and controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player after a variable display result of identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, variable display is performed by updating or scrolling predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as LCD). There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result (variable display result).

  As an example of the variable display game, the variable display of the display symbol is completely stopped based on the detection of the game ball passing through the starting winning opening (the variable display start condition is satisfied). In some cases, the case where the stop symbol mode (variable display result) is a specific display mode determined in advance is called “big hit”. In this variable display game, when it is a “big hit”, a special electric accessory called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. . Such a state is referred to as a “specific game state” or a “hit game state”. In addition, the predetermined variable display state that may be a “big hit” in the variable display game is “reach” (also referred to as “reach state”), and the variable display state of the display symbol is “reach” There are known gaming machines that perform various production operations.

  The progress of the game in such a gaming machine is controlled by game control means using a microcomputer or the like. On the other hand, presentation operations such as display operations of display symbols, character images, and background images on the display device may be controlled by control means (for example, presentation control means) that operate according to commands from the game control means. At this time, since the display control program has a large capacity, it is difficult to control the display operation on the side of the game control means. Therefore, the control means using a microcomputer other than the game control means (for example, Production control means or the like is used. As an example of a gaming machine that performs display control by a control means different from the game control means based on a command from the game control means, whether or not the background image is independently determined by the display control means and whether or not the probability change control is performed. There has been proposed a case in which “sea” is displayed as a background image that is unknown and a case in which “universe” is displayed as a background image that is known to be subjected to probability variation control (for example, Patent Document 1). .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-208902 (paragraphs 0141, 0191-0197, etc.)

  In the control means using a microcomputer or the like, a program is stored in a ROM or the like, and data that temporarily occurs during the progress of control or data that changes with the progress of control is stored in the RAM. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped due to a power failure or the like in the gaming machine, the data in the RAM is lost. And if it returns to an initial state at the time of recovery from a power failure or the like, there may be a disadvantage to the player, for example, the profit based on the occurrence of the jackpot is lost.

  In order to avoid such a situation, when the power supply is stopped in the gaming machine, necessary data is stored in a storage device such as a RAM that can be backed up, and the data stored when the power is restored is stored. You may restore and resume the game. Here, when the progress of the game is controlled by the game control means, when the effect operation such as the display operation is controlled by a control means different from the game control means, the progress of the game can be recovered by restoring the data. However, the state of the production operation cannot be recovered, and there is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the gaming state and the state of the production operation.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately restoring the state of the rendering operation even when the power supply is stopped.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application has a start condition (for example, No determination in step S231) established after a start condition (for example, No determination in step S202) is satisfied. The variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the image display) for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and decorative symbols) that can be identified based on The display area of the device 5 includes “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R, etc., and the variable display result of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result (for example, big hit A game machine (for example, a patch) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player after a symbol or a jackpot combination finalized decorative pattern is obtained. Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, ROM 101, RAM 102, CPU 103, etc. of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11), and from the game control means Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, etc. mounted on the production control board 12) for controlling the production operation in the gaming machine based on the command, the game control means, Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state, and the probability that the specific display result of the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, low probability low base state, etc.) For example, a variable display result is derived and displayed as to whether or not to control to a highly accurate high base state or a highly accurate low base state. Predetermining means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S238 to S245) determined in advance, and gaming state control means (for example, the CPU 103) controlling the gaming state based on the determination by the predetermining means. , After executing the processes of steps S309, S324, and S327, the process of steps S238, S241, and S243, the normal symbol determination process of step S141, and the normal electric actor operation process of step S144) Backup storage means (for example, the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100) that stores the contents determined by the prior determination means and the control contents by the game state control means in a backupable manner even when the power supply to the game is stopped, Power supply resumes after power supply to the machine is stopped A recovery processing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the gaming state recovery processing in step S10) that executes the recovery processing of the control state based on the storage contents of the backup storage means, and the gaming state control Command transmission means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the command control processing of step S58, etc.) for transmitting a gaming state designation command (for example, background designation command) capable of specifying the gaming state controlled by the means, and The control means includes a first effect state (for example, fourth effect mode # 4) corresponding to the high probability state, and a game other than the high probability state and the high probability state. The second effect state corresponding to any of the states (for example, the second effect mode # 2 or the third effect mode # 3) Effect state storage processing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for storing the effect state to be controlled in a volatile storage means (for example, the RAM 122)), in steps S423, S425, S432 to S434, A part that executes any one of the processes of S439, S447, and S453) and an effect state control unit (for example, an effect) that controls the effect state in the gaming machine to one of a plurality of types based on the storage content of the volatile storage unit. In step S517, the control CPU 120 sets a plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in any one of the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D based on the setting of the effect mode designation buffer as shown in FIG. The part that determines any of these as the production control pattern to be used Etc.) and a, the command transmitting unit, after the recovery process has been executed by the restoration processing means, in response to the variable display of the identification information is started to send the game state specification command (e.g. After the CPU 103 executes the gaming state restoration process in step S10, based on the transmission setting in step S280 , a part for transmitting a background designation command in the command control process in step S58), the effect state control means After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the control of the first effect state, the second effect state is controlled in response to the gaming state designation command based on the restart of the power supply (for example, the first effect state) In response to the resumption of power supply after the power supply is stopped in the production mode # 4 of No. 4, the production control CPU 120 performs the operation in step S421. Based on the determination of Yes and the determination of Yes in step S422, the processing state of step S423 is executed, so that the effect state becomes the third effect mode # 3).

According to such a configuration, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, after the recovery processing based on the storage content of the backup storage means is executed by the recovery processing means, the gaming state A command transmission means transmits a gaming state designation command capable of specifying the gaming state controlled by the control means. The effect state control means is configured to respond to the game state designation command based on the fact that the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped during the control of the first effect state corresponding to the high probability state. Control is made to a second effect state corresponding to one of the game states other than the probability state and the high probability state. Thus, even if the power supply is stopped during the control of the first performance state corresponding to the high probability state, it is either the high probability state or a gaming state other than the high probability state when the power supply is resumed. By controlling to the second production state corresponding to that, even if the memory of the production state disappears due to the stop of power supply, it prevents the discrepancy between the gaming state and the production state, and appropriately creates the production state It can be recovered. A gaming state designation command is transmitted in response to the start of variable display of identification information. Thereby, the number of commands transmitted when the recovery processing means executes the recovery processing can be reduced, and the control burden in the recovery processing can be reduced.

  The gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means includes an advantageous gaming state in which the start condition is more likely to be established than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state), and the presentation state The control means controls either the first effect state or the second effect state in response to the advantageous game state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows an example in FIGS. 80 and 81). The third production mode # 3 and the fourth production mode # 4 in the high-accuracy base state or the low-accuracy base state), and the power supply to the gaming machine is performed during the control of the second production state. After stopping, based on the resumption of power supply, it may be controlled to the second effect state in response to the gaming state designation command (for example, power supply when in the third effect mode # 3) Stopped The effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S423 based on the determination of Yes in step S421 and the determination of Yes in step S422, so that the effect state is the first. 3 and so on in the production mode # 3).

  In such a configuration, in response to being in the advantageous gaming state, control is performed to either the first effect state or the second effect state, and the power supply is stopped after the power supply is stopped during the control of the second effect state. Based on the resumption of the supply, the second effect state is controlled according to the game state designation command. Thus, even if the power supply is stopped during the control of the second effect state corresponding to the advantageous gaming state, when the power supply is resumed, the second effect state is controlled according to the game state designation command. Even if the memory of the production state disappears due to the stoppage of power supply, it is possible to recognize at least the advantageous gaming state and prevent the discrepancy between the gaming state and the production state and properly restore the production state can do.

  The command transmission means transmits a customer waiting command (for example, a customer waiting demo designation command) on the condition that the start condition is not satisfied after the variable display of the identification information is completed (for example, the CPU 103 performs step S250). The game state designation command may be transmitted in response to the transmission of the customer waiting command (for example, the CPU 103 executes the command in step S58 based on the transmission setting in step S251). For example, the part that executes control processing).

  In such a configuration, the gaming state designation command is transmitted in response to transmitting the customer waiting command. Thereby, the number of commands transmitted when the recovery processing means executes the recovery processing can be reduced, and the control burden in the recovery processing can be reduced.

  The effect control means, based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted, until the gaming state designation command is received (for example, FIG. 66 (B)). (For example, a part in which the production control CPU 120 performs the power failure recovery screen display setting in response to the power failure recovery designation command in the command analysis processing in step S405). May be included.

  In such a configuration, based on the restart of power supply, a predetermined in-recovery notification is performed until a gaming state designation command is received. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an effect operation in an effect state that is inconsistent with the game state before the game state designation command is transmitted, and to appropriately restore the effect state.

  The game control means determines whether or not to change the variable display state of the identification information to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the prior determination means does not control the specific game state. The variation pattern type of the identification information is determined based on reach determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S265 to S269), the determination result by the prior determination means, and the determination result by the reach determination means. A variation pattern type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes one of the processes in steps S262, S264, S270, and S271 and then executes the processes in steps S272 and S273), Variation pattern included in variation pattern type determined by variation pattern type determination means Variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S274 to S276), and the command transmission means includes the determination result by the prior determination means A command that can specify the determination result by the variation pattern determination means is transmitted (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether the determination result of step S58 is based on the transmission setting by the variation pattern designation command setting data and variable display result notification command setting data in step S280). The effect control means executes an effect operation corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination means during variable display of the identification information based on a command from the command transmission means. Effect executing means (for example, CPU for effect control) 20 is based on the effect control pattern determined in step S517, and the like. The variation pattern type determination means is set to the reach state by the reach determination means. Corresponding to the reach state, for example, normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. (For example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the processing in steps S272 and S273 after the CPU 103 executes the processing in step S270), and the reach determination means determines that the reach state is not set. In response to what has been done, a specific effect ( For example, a plurality of types including a variation pattern type (for example, a variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, etc.) for executing “sliding”, “pseudo train”, “main notice”, “end of development opportunity”, etc.) It is determined as one of the fluctuation pattern types (for example, non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3, etc.) The CPU 103 executes the process of step S271 and then executes the process of steps S272 and S273), and the variation pattern determination unit corresponds to the determination that the reach determination unit sets the reach state. The variation pattern of the identification information includes a plurality of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit. Reach variation patterns (for example, variation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3-5, super PC3-1 to super PC3-4, etc.) (For example, the part where the processing of steps S275 and S276 is executed after the CPU 103 sets the loss variation pattern determination table 138B in step S274) and the reach determination means does not set the reach state. And the variation pattern of the identification information is executed in response to the determination that the variation pattern type is determined by the variation pattern type determination means. Multiple types of non-reach fluctuation patterns (eg non-reach) (For example, the CPU 103 determines that the variable pattern type of the non-reach CA1-4 is determined in step S273). Then, after setting the loss variation pattern determination table 138A in step S274, the part that executes the processing of steps S275 and S276, etc.).

  In such a configuration, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determination unit, the variation pattern type determination unit determines the variation pattern type for executing a specific effect during the variable display of the identification information. It is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns to be included. At this time, in response to the fact that the variation pattern type for executing a specific effect is determined, the variation pattern determining means uses a plurality of types of non-reach variation patterns for executing the specific effect as the variation pattern of the identification information. Decide on either. Thereby, even when the variable display state of the identification information does not become the reach state, it is possible to execute a specific effect so that a variety of effects can be performed, and the game entertainment can be improved. The variation pattern type determination means determines one of the plurality of types of variation pattern types according to the reach state in response to the determination that the reach state is set by the reach determination means. In response to the determination that the reach state is not made by the means, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type for executing a specific effect. Then, the variation pattern determining means responds to the decision to reach the reach state by the reach determining means, and the plurality of types of reach variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determining means. In response to the decision that the reach state is not to be made while the decision is made to any one, and the change pattern type for which the specific effect is executed by the change pattern type determination means, Is determined to be one of a plurality of types of non-reach fluctuation patterns. As described above, the variation pattern type determination unit and the variation pattern determination unit make different determinations depending on whether or not the reach determination unit determines to reach the reach state. Therefore, as the numerical data indicating the random number value used to determine the variation pattern type, common numerical data can be used regardless of the determination result of whether to reach the reach state, and the variation pattern of the identification information is determined. Common numerical data can be used as the numerical data indicating the random value used for the determination regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the amount of program by reducing the amount of processing in the random number update processing executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command table for fluctuation | variation start. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example which combined the starting data storage area and the random value storage area. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a game state designation | designated buffer. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an input port. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion production | presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect mode determination table and an effect end determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notification effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of various effect control pattern tables. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect mode designation | designated buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state restoration process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of an electric power supply stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of a fluctuation special figure designation | designated buffer setting value and the maximum number of times of winning a prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state designation | designated buffer setting value. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing content performed by command analysis processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the various screens in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of background designation | designated. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of background designation | designated. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of background designation | designated. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory increase display process. It is a figure which shows the operation example in a pending | holding memory | storage display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of the game state and effect state after completion | finish of a big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of the game state and effect state after completion | finish of a small hit game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation corresponding to an effect state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation corresponding to an effect state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation corresponding to an effect state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation corresponding to an effect state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of the game state and effect state in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, a decorative design or color design, which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified by a decorative design display unit that is a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts, such as three, or a color design display unit. (Also referred to as “4th symbol”) is variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative design and the color design is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R start decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display). Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display units are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image indicating a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display portions 5 </ b> A and 5 </ b> B are arranged. When the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the color symbol change (for example, update of the display color) starts in the “left” color symbol display unit 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display unit 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The color symbols variably displayed on the “left” and “right” color symbol display portions 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “Blue” etc.) may be included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively.

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning memory display portion 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display section 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display is based on the fact that the game ball has entered (starting winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. This occurs when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  As an example, the start winning memory display unit 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the start winning memory display section 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display unit 5H or instead of the start winning memory display unit 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display section 5H, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories identifiable on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 (FIG. 2) that is used for a normal electric accessory. A mold accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the game ball is in a normally open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, so that the game ball is in an expanded and open state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the second starter switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate, an operation button 30 that can be predetermined by the player (for example, a pressing operation) is installed.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the operation is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second special condition game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is finished, the high-accuracy base state, which is one of a plurality of types of special game states, is obtained. Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, the low-accuracy high-base state that is different from the high-accuracy high-base state among the plurality of types of special game states is obtained. In a gaming state including a high base state (also referred to as a “short-time state” or “time reduction state”) such as a high-accuracy base state or a low-accuracy base state, a low base state such as a low-accuracy low base state that is a normal state is used. Compared with the game state including, control that shortens the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) in the regular symbol game by the regular symbol display 20, and the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol in each regular symbol game is Control for improving the probability of “winning”, control for increasing the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal”, and control for increasing the number of tilts The possibility of a game ball entering the second start winning opening is increased compared to a game state including a low base state, and the second start condition is easily established, which is advantageous for the player. Control is carried out. In the gaming state including the high base state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Further, in the game state including the high base state, time-shortening control is performed in which the average special symbol variation time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened.

  Here, the low probability low base state is a gaming state that is different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a special gaming state in which at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed, and a small hit gaming state. Yes, the same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system is reset) is performed. The advantageous release control in the game state including the high base state may be continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit” regardless of the number of times of execution of the special figure game. On the other hand, in the advantageous release control in the gaming state including the high base state, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and the variable display result is “big hit” (or 15 rounds). The process may be terminated when any of the conditions is established first. In this embodiment, in the advantageous release control in the low probability and high base state, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without the variable display result being “big hit”. It ends on the condition. As a result, the low-accuracy and high-base state ends and the low-accuracy and low-base state is established. On the other hand, with respect to the advantageous release control in the high-accuracy high-base state, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display result may be continued until the next big display result becomes the “big hit”, or the variable display result is “big hit” The high-accuracy high-base state may be changed to the high-accuracy-low base state by ending on the condition that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without becoming. In addition, like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is not subjected to the probability change control after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is normally used. It is called a jackpot symbol (also referred to as “non-probable big hit symbol”). On the other hand, like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol for which the probability change control is performed after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is completed. This is called the probable big hit symbol.

  After the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which becomes the two-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, for example, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state. A change related to probability variation control is performed. At this time, for example, the setting for starting the advantageous opening control and the time-shortening control such as changing the low base state to the high base state may not be performed. As a result, when the 2 round big hit symbol becomes a confirmed special symbol in the special game in the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state, a plurality of types of special game states are One of them is a highly accurate and low base state. In addition, when the 2-round big hit symbol becomes a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game in the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy high-base state, the high-accuracy high-base state is entered after the 2-round big hit state ends. Note that, at the end of the two round big hit state, a setting for starting the advantageous opening control and the time reduction control may be performed together with the change related to the probability variation control, so that the high probability high base state may be always obtained. In gaming states that include high-accuracy states (also referred to as “probability variation state” or “high-probability state”) such as high-accuracy base state and high-accuracy low base state, low such as low-accuracy base state and low-accuracy base state Compared to the gaming state including the certain state, in the variable display of each special figure game or decoration pattern, the variable display result is improved to be a “big hit” and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is increased. The probability change control in the gaming state including the high probability state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game. On the other hand, in the probability change control in the gaming state including the high probability state, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” (or 15 round big hit) The process may be terminated when any of the conditions is established first. In this embodiment, regardless of whether the high-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, the probability change control in the game state including the high-accuracy state is the next variable display after the big hit game state ends. Continue until the result is a “big hit”. Further, in this embodiment, after the round two big hit state is finished, for example, the setting for starting the advantageous opening control and the short time control such as changing the low base state to the high base state is not performed. On the other hand, when the game state includes a high base state such as a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state, a 2-round jackpot based on the fact that the 2-round jackpot symbol has become a confirmed special symbol in a special game. When the state is controlled, advantageous release control and time-shortening control in the gaming state including the high base state continue until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” after the two round big hit state is finished. Set to be done.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if it is determined that the advantageous release control or the short-time control is to be ended in response to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the low base state is set after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5 </ b> L based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. At 5C and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started, and, for example, the fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle” are stopped and displayed (derived display). Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the fixed decorative symbols is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, there may be included one that stops and displays a decorative symbol that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol at the same time.

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol displays 5L, 5C, and 5R, The decorative display variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, etc.) The remaining decorative symbol display part (for example, “medium”) that has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped is displayed. In the symbol display portion 5C, etc., the decorative symbols are changing, or the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R are all or part of the decorative symbols. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “main notice”, “expansion chance”, and “expansion chance end” are set to be executable. In addition, the specific effect in this embodiment should just change a special figure fluctuation time according to whether a corresponding effect operation is performed. For example, when a specific effect is executed, it is only necessary that the special figure change time becomes longer than when the specific effect is not executed.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display units (the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R are changed, and then two or more decorative symbol display units ( For example, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “ 2 ”), the decorative symbol display unit (for example, one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display unit 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display unit 5R) is changed again and then stopped. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After all the decorative symbols are changed in the portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5C are displayed. The effect display for changing the decorative design again (pseudo continuous change) at 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “main notice”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display portions 5L. Before the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at 5C and 5R (final stop display), the decorative symbol can be changed by, for example, an effect display previously associated with the reach effect or an effect display different from the effect display associated in advance. An effect display for notifying the player that the display state may be a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” is performed as an effect operation that becomes the main notice effect. Is called.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display portions are displayed. After 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the predetermined display effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. The As an example, in the specific production of “Development Chance”, the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B are displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “end of development chance”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all decorative symbols are displayed. In the parts 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as a development opportunity is stopped and displayed as a final decorative pattern (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A sub-notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may be a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, sub-notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable. It should be noted that the sub-notice effect in this embodiment may be any one that does not change the special figure variation time depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed.

  In the “character display” sub-notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then two or more decorative symbols are displayed. The character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 before temporarily displaying the decorative symbols on the display portion (for example, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R). An effect display for displaying is performed.

  In the sub-notification effect of “step-up image”, two or more decorations are made after changing the decoration symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Before the decorative display is temporarily stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, an effect display for switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order is performed in the display area of the image display device 5. is there. In the sub-notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, The effect display in the sub-notice effect may be terminated without switching the image.

  In the sub-notice effect of “mail display”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Before the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit, an effect operation such as, for example, changing the display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player. A changing effect display is performed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There is a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination or a fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the determined decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this way, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the low probability high base state. Become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined probability variation big hit combination and May be displayed in a stopped manner. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are the probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect is The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is displayed without being executed is referred to as the variable display mode of “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the high probability high base state is controlled. It will be.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect different from the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variable” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second probability change”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the high probability high base state is controlled. It will be.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the normal jackpot combination fixed decoration Symbols may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect. In the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed without being executed, the variable display mode of “third probability variation” or “fourth probability variation” when the variable display result is “big bonus”. This is called a display mode. After the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation” or “fourth probability variation”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state. Will be controlled by the state. It should be noted that the variable display result is “big hit” in the high-precision high-base state that is controlled after the 15-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “fourth probability change”. On the condition that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without becoming, the high base state ends and the high probability low base state is obtained.

  As described above, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed symbol design that is a probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol variable display. , It is determined that the high-accuracy and high-base state is established after the control is made to the 15-round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “third probability variation” or “fourth probability variation”, the variable symbol is normally displayed by variable display of the decorative symbol as in the case where the variable display mode is “normal”. The confirmed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation” or “fourth probability variation”, it is determined from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol whether the high-accuracy base state or the low-accuracy base state is obtained. Cannot recognize it. In other words, the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes a promising big hit combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the special display that is determined to be controlled to the high probability state such as the high probability high base state. Included in the results. On the other hand, the fixed decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled in a highly accurate state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, and a predetermined non- A fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination is stopped and displayed, or a fixed decorative pattern that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. In some cases, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state ends, the high probability state is controlled. At this time, for example, the setting for starting the advantageous opening control and the time-saving control such as changing the low base state to the high base state is not performed. However, two rounds based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise” when the game state includes a high base state such as a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state. When the big hit state is controlled, after the two round big hit state is finished, until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, the advantageous release control and the short time control in the gaming state including the high base state are continued. To be done.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the ornament is displayed in the same manner as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”. After the variable display of the symbol is performed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. There are cases where the display is stopped, or a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols on which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3 (C) is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “accurate”, and the variable display mode is “small”. When it is “winning”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In other words, when the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “probable”. Determine. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues. In addition, if it is determined that the advantageous opening control or the short-time control is finished corresponding to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the low base state is set after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “third probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation”, the decoration symbol During the variable display, the changing promotion effect as the specific changing display may be executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, a decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination is temporarily displayed on the effective lines of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. After that, for example, the decorative pattern display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are changed again in a state where the same decorative pattern is aligned, and the decorative symbol that becomes a probable big hit combination, Any of the decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being “normal”, “third probability variation”, or “fourth probability variation”, As the promotion effect, a changing promotion failure effect that stops and displays the fixed decorative symbol that is normally a combination of big hits after the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped and displayed is changed again is performed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “third probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed. From the control of 15 rounds to the big hit state, during the period until the 15 rounds of big hit state ends, the promotion effect during the big hit as a notification effect of whether or not the probability change control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state Executed. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, a jackpot that informs that there is a promotion in which the game state includes a high probability state (specifically, a high probability high base state) even though the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination There are a medium promotion success production and a jackpot medium promotion failure production that informs that there is no promotion that includes a highly accurate state. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. Before the jackpot gaming state is completed, by executing the success promotion effect during the jackpot, it is notified that there is a promotion that becomes a gaming state including a high-definition state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and the notification that there is a promotion that becomes a gaming state including a highly accurate state is not performed. In addition, even when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “fourth probability variation”, By the time that the big hit gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that results in a gaming state including a high probability state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, the color symbol in the “left” color symbol display unit 5A corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. The variable display is performed, and the variable display of the symbol in the “right” color symbol display unit 5B is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is called. Then, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, the fixed color symbol is stopped and displayed on the “left” color symbol display unit 5A. The As an example, when a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display unit In 5A, the color design indicating “yellow” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. In addition, when any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”, which are the 15-round jackpot symbols, is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, “Left In the color symbol display portion 5A of “”, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the determined color symbol. Further, when a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display unit 5A confirms the symbol. A color design indicating “blue” as a color design is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” that is the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display unit is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “green” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. If any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, In the color symbol display portion 5B, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color symbol. When a special symbol showing a symbol “-” that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, the “right” color symbol display portion 5B displays the confirmed color symbol. As a result, the color design indicating “blue” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to one of the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4. In the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4, the display mode of the effect image on the image display device 5, the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting display mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. Various production operation modes are different. The effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is switched to any of the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4 based on the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. Among these, 1st production mode # 1 is the production state corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the low probability low base state. That is, the first performance mode # 1 corresponds to a gaming state including a low probability state (a gaming state not including a high probability state). Further, the first performance mode # 1 is not controlled when the gaming state includes the high base state. The second performance mode # 2 is a performance state corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being either a high-accuracy low base state or a low-accuracy low base state. That is, the second performance mode # 2 corresponds to any one of a gaming state including a high-probability state and a gaming state including a low-probability state (a gaming state not including a high-probability state). Further, the second performance mode # 2 is not controlled when the gaming state includes the high base state. The third effect mode # 3 is an effect state corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being either a highly accurate high base state or a low accurate high base state. That is, the third performance mode # 3 corresponds to any one of a gaming state including a high probability state and a gaming state including a low probability state (a gaming state not including a high probability state). In addition, the third performance mode # 3 may be controlled when the gaming state includes a high base state. The fourth effect mode # 4 is an effect state corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being a highly accurate high base state. In other words, the fourth effect mode # 4 corresponds to the gaming state including the high probability state. The fourth effect mode # 4 may be controlled when the gaming state includes a high base state. In addition to the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4, the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared so that it can be switched by the player's selection. For example, it is only necessary that switching can be performed in response to detection of a predetermined operation (for example, pressing operation) of the operation button 30 within a period during which a predetermined demonstration screen (demo screen) is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22 </ b> A and 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, first and second hold indicators 25A and 25B, a general symbol hold indicator 25C, and the like. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, a wiring for transmitting a solenoid driving signal for controlling driving of the solenoids 81 and 82, and the like are connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like may be included. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special graphic game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5A, a prior determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative display variable display mode in the case of “big hit” is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability” Data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a jackpot type determining result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a jackpot type determining result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. . The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a jackpot type determining result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “second probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. . The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a jackpot type determining result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. . The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “fourth probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C07H is an eighth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern shown by the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command and the variable display result shown by the variable display result notification command can be specified by one production | presentation control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “small hit”, “big hit” and “big hit” in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  A command 8F00H shown in FIG. 4 is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. It is. The command 9000H is an initial display designation command (also referred to as “power-on designation command”) that is transmitted when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and designates display of an initial screen when the power is turned on. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that is transmitted when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed and designates display of a predetermined power failure restoration screen.

  The command 95XXH is a background designation command for designating display of a background image according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the background designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of the low probability low base state, the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy low base state, and the high accuracy high base state. EXT data is set according to whether it exists. On the side of the effect control board 12, processing for setting the effect state to any one of the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4 is executed based on the gaming state specified from the background designation command. More specifically, the command 9500H is a normal state background HKA designation command for designating display of the normal state background HKA in response to the gaming state being the low probability low base state, and the production state is the first production mode. It is set to # 1 or the second effect mode # 2. The command 9501H is a probability change state background HKB designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKB according to the gaming state being the high probability high base state, and the effect state is the third effect mode # 3 or the fourth effect mode. Production mode # 4 is set. The command 9502H is a time-short state background HKC designation command for designating display of the time-short state background HKC in response to the gaming state being the low probability base state, and the effect state is set to the third effect mode # 3. . The command 9503H is a probability change state background HKD designation command for designating display of the probability change state background HKD according to the gaming state being the high probability low base state, and the effect state is set to the second effect mode # 2. . In this embodiment, a background designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the transmission of a customer waiting demonstration designation command. Sent to.

  A command 9F00H shown in FIG. 4 is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating display of a demonstration screen for waiting for a customer. The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted on the condition that neither the first start condition nor the second start condition is satisfied after the special display game or the decorative symbol variable display is finished. The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (C), EXT data corresponding to which of 15 open games and 2 open games is played in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is set. More specifically, the command A000H is a first hit start designation command that notifies the start of a 15-time open game in response to the big hit game state being the 15 round big hit state. Command A001H is a second hit start designation command for notifying the start of a two-time open game in response to the big hit game state being a two round big hit state, or not being a big hit game state but a small hit game state. It is. In the hit start designation command, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH shown in FIG. 4 specifies the display of an effect image for the 15th round big hit that specifies the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize opening is open in each round corresponding to the 15th round big hit state. It is a command. Command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in the interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state 15 This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5D, EXT data corresponding to various notification contents is set. More specifically, the command A301H is a first hit end designation command that notifies the start of the fourth effect mode # 4 based on the end of the 15 round big hit state. Command A302H is a second hit end designation command for notifying that the third rendering mode # 3 is started based on the end of the 15th round big hit state. The command A303H is a third hit end designation command for notifying that the two-round big hit state has ended based on the variable display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “surprise”. The command A304H is a fourth hit end designation command for notifying that the small hit gaming state is ended based on the variable display result being “small hit”. In the hit end designation command, even though EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command is set, even if different EXT data is set according to the predetermined decision result or the big hit type decision result. Good. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH corresponds to the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for sudden / small hits that designates the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening is open in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round or variable winning operation corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state. This is a command that is designated after opening the big prize opening for small hits. In the command for opening the big prize opening for the accuracy / small hit and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big win state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  The command B001H is used to execute a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH includes a first reserved memory number, a second reserved memory number, and the like so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the start winning memory display unit 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory number notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A and the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining the reach 2. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 22, for example, to update various numerical data by software, so that the random value MR1, Numerical data indicating a part of MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit value This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the random display value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, “surprise probability” Is a random number value used to determine one of the big hit types as the plurality of types of specific variable display types, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. A value in the range of “1” to “239” is taken.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “251”. Take. In addition, by determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the special symbol variation from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol Time is also determined. That is, the decorative pattern variation pattern is also a special symbol variation pattern.

  FIG. 7 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 5. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-8, super PA5-1 to super PA5-4, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PC4-1 and super PC4-2, super PD1 -1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3 Variation patterns of -1 to special PG3-3 are prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 9B. . The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine. In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the first bit (bit 1) in the gaming state designation buffer provided in the gaming control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 22 is “0” (off) or “1”. Setting data (determination data) for associating (allocating) the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result with the big hit decision value data, the small hit decision value data, the lost decision value data, etc. It is composed of Here, the first bit (bit 1) in the gaming state designation buffer is “0” when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming state including a low probability state such as a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state. On the other hand, it is “1” (on) when the gaming state includes a high probability state such as a highly accurate low base state or a highly accurate high base state. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B has a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether the first bit (bit 1) in the gaming state designation buffer is “0” or “1”. Are made up of decision data assigned to jackpot decision value data and loss decision value data.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. The jackpot type determination table 131 shows that when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability”. The jackpot type determination table 131 indicates whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 22 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type is composed of determining data assigned to the jackpot types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 22 (the jackpot type buffer value) based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. It may include table data (setting data) for setting to any of “00” to “05” corresponding to the jackpot type.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the big hit type is determined for the big hit type of “surprise”. The assignment of the random value MR2-1 is different. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the value in the range of “83” to “100” of the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 11 (A) to 11 (F) and FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is based on the table selection setting as shown in FIG. It is selected as a use table according to whether the base state is a low base state or a high-accuracy high-base state, or the determination result of the jackpot type. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. The random number value MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4. -2, special CC 4-1, and special CC 4-2.

  Here, as an example, focusing on the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a low-probability low-base state, the jackpot type is any one of “normal”, “third probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation”. 11A used for the big hit, and the big hit variation pattern type determination shown in FIG. 11B used when the big hit type is “first probability change”. The table 132B is different from the normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 in the allocation of the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is selected. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. Thus, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, the high probability low base state, or the high probability high base state, Big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132D selected according to the big hit type (selected when the low probability low base state or high probability low base state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (high accuracy When the high hit state is selected), the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C and 132I (selected in the low probability high base state) are compared with each other, the change pattern type for each change pattern type according to the big hit type The allocation of the random number MR3 for determination is different, and for different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type Random number MR3 for dynamic pattern type determination has been assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132H, 132I used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise”, such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, if attention is paid to the case where the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state, or a high probability low base state. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11 (A) used in either case, and the jackpot variation pattern shown in FIG. 11 (E) used when the gaming state is a highly accurate base state. In the type determination table 132E, the allocation of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern types of the normal CA 3-1 and the super CA 3-2 is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. In this way, paying attention to the case where the jackpot type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal”, “third probability variation”, or “fourth probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F ( (Selected for “first probability variation”), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132G (selected for “second probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I (“surprise” When selected, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are low probability low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy low base state, high accuracy high base state The allocation of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is a deviation, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. MR3 may be assigned. Thereby, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it becomes possible to determine different variation pattern types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C follows, for example, the table selection setting as shown in FIG. It is selected as a use table depending on whether the base state is low or high. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 13B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 13C, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132I for use. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 11 (D) and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. Big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. 13C, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A used when the variable display result is “small hit”, and FIG. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 13B and the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 13C are set so as to include common variation pattern types.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing”. 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 14D, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state, a high probability low base state, It is selected as a usage table depending on which of the high-accuracy and high-base states it is. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C includes a random number MR2-2 for determination of reach as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR2-2 for reach determination. Are assigned to the non-reach HA1-2 decision result. Further, in response to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than “ A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the reach determination random numbers MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative design is determined to be the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of determination data assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15A, “1” to “1” among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” among the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that the reach determination random number MR 2-2 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134 A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”. The determination result of the reach HA2-3 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is not set to the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 17, 18A and 18B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern depending on whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative pattern variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative pattern variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 19, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, in response to the variation pattern type of non-reach CB1-3, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “end of development opportunity eye” is executed. Assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7. With such a setting, the variation pattern is changed from non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach in response to the determination that the variable display result is “losing” and the determination that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state. It can be decided to reach one of the reach PAs 1-7, and an effect operation as a specific effect can be executed.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, in non-reach variation pattern type variation pattern 136A shown in FIG. 16A, out of random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, non-reach HA1. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to −1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to non-reach HA1-2. Values in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned corresponding to the reach HA1-3, and “237” to “241” corresponding to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5, respectively. A range value is assigned. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1”, and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “5” to “8”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed is 7.75 seconds, The special figure change time in the change pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 20, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is normal CA2-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA2-3 or Super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, for example, the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, such as the variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, and Super PB 3-4, is a decorative pattern after the pseudo-variable variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, it corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is set in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1 and super CA2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. Further, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. 15A and 15C. ing. For the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  As an example of a command table stored in the ROM 101, in this embodiment, a first change start command table 200A as shown in FIG. 21A and a second change start time as shown in FIG. Command table 200B is prepared. The first variation start command table 200A is displayed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when starting the special display game using the first special figure or the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition. On the other hand, it is composed of setting data for transmitting various effect control commands. When the second variation start command table 200B starts the variable display of the special game using the second special figure and the decorative symbols based on the establishment of the second start condition, the command table 200B is changed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, it is composed of setting data for transmitting various effect control commands.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21A, as setting data constituting the first variation start command table 200A, first variation start command setting data, variation pattern designation command setting data, variable display result notification command setting Data and setting data for background specification commands are included. In the example shown in FIG. 21B, as setting data constituting the second change start command table 200B, second change start command setting data, change pattern designation command setting data, variable display result notification command setting Data and setting data for background specification commands are included. The first variation start command setting data is setting data used for transmitting the first variation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second variation start command setting data is setting data used to transmit a second variation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern designation command setting data is setting data used to transmit a variation pattern designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variable display result notification command setting data is setting data used to transmit a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting data for background designation command is setting data used for transmitting a background designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the first variation start command table 200 </ b> A and the second variation start command table 200 </ b> B, each effect control command is sent in accordance with the order in which a plurality of types of effect control commands are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. It suffices if setting data for transmission is arranged. For example, in the configuration example of the first variation start command table 200A shown in FIG. 21A, the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the background designation command are arranged in this order from the main board 11. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. The order in which a plurality of types of effect control commands are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is arbitrary. For example, after the background designation command is transmitted first, the first change start command or the second change command is sent. You may make it transmit in order of a start command, a change pattern designation | designated command, and a variable display result notification command. In this case, the arrangement order of the setting data in the first variation start command table 200A and the second variation start command table 200B may be set in conformity with the transmission order of each effect control command.

  In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. 22, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A data holding area 150 is provided. Further, at least a part of the RAM 102 is a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power source created on, for example, a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 22 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, an area corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, “4”) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, and associated with the reservation numbers in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment of the first start condition by the winning is shown. Numerical data is stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, an area corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, “4”) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, and associated with the reservation numbers in the order of winning in the second start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second start condition by the winning. Numerical data is stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, an area corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number is secured in the start data storage unit 151C, and “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening Alternatively, “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored in association with the holding number according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, and the start data storage unit 151C may be provided separately, or a storage area that is a combination of these may be provided. . As an example, as shown in FIG. 23, a storage area including eight areas obtained by combining the start data storage area and the random value storage area may be provided. In the configuration shown in FIG. 23, continuous addresses in the RAM 102 may be allocated to the start data storage area and the random value storage area.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 23, for example, the start data is set in the start data storage area that is the head of the free area by updating the value of the pointer that specifies the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved storage. At this time, in order to specify the head of the free space, for example, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data in one piece of reserved data (numerical data indicating start data and random number values) (start data storage) A value obtained by adding one area) is specified as an address offset value. The pointer value may be updated in accordance with the offset value thus specified. In the configuration shown in FIG. 23, a total of two data storage areas, one start data storage area and one random number value storage area, are provided corresponding to one reserved data. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 to a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories is specified as an address offset value. As an example, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “+7” (a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories “3” and adding 1) is specified and corresponds to this offset value. The start data is set in the start data storage area. If a total of three data storage areas including one start-up data storage area and two random number value storage areas are provided corresponding to one reserved data, the total number of reserved memories is tripled. A value obtained by adding 1 (a value obtained by adding one start data storage area) may be specified as the offset value of the address.

  Further, when the initial position of the pointer for designating the data storage destination address is used as the start data storage area corresponding to the hold number “1” shown in FIG. The multiplied value may be specified as the offset value of the address. For example, in the configuration shown in FIG. 23, a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved storages may be specified as the address offset value. When a total of three data storage areas including one start-up data storage area and two random number value storage areas are provided corresponding to one hold data, a value obtained by multiplying the total hold storage number by three is obtained. The address offset value may be specified.

  After the start data is set in the start data storage area in this way, 1 is added to the value of the pointer specifying the address, and numerical data indicating the random number value is stored in the random value storage area of the address pointed to by the pointer after the addition. That's fine.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 includes a special process flag, a general process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, first and second upper limit flags, a backup flag, a parity flag, a demo flag, etc. Is provided.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S56 of FIG. 52 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in the ordinary symbol process shown in step S57 of FIG. 52 or the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 63 executed to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the game is cleared and turned off in response to the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game.

  The first upper limit flag indicates that when the game ball enters (starts winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, the first reserved memory number becomes a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). Set to the ON state in response to reaching. The second upper limit flag has a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) when the game ball enters (starts winning) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Is set to the on state in response to reaching.

  The backup flag indicates whether or not a predetermined memory protection process has been executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. For example, when “55H” is set as the value of the backup flag, backup is present (ON state), while when a value other than “55H” is set, backup is not present (OFF state). The parity flag stores the setting of the interrupt flag in the game control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The in-demonstration flag is set to an on state in response to the transmission of a customer waiting demo designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, the demonstration flag is cleared and turned off in response to the start of the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure fluctuation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal map change timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time which is the execution time of the normal game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a special game counter, a round number counter, and the like. Yes.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 is stored as random count values, which are periodically updated according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The special figure game counter is a predetermined number of times without a variable display result being a “big hit” among gaming states in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state. This is for counting the number of special figure games that have been executed after the big hit gaming state has ended in a gaming state in which the high base state ends on the condition that the special figure game is executed. As an example, in the special figure game counter, data indicating a count initial value “100” when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is either “normal” or “fourth probability variation” ends. Is set as the special figure game count value. Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the special figure game count value is updated by 1 every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the special figure game count value reaches “0”, control is performed to end the high base state and shift to the low base state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variation special designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, a start port buffer, a game state designation buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area in which setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and may be configured so that a plurality of buffer areas can be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the variable special figure designation buffer (variable special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to In response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2”. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  In the jackpot type buffer, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. The buffer value corresponding to the determination result as one of the above is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 10, if the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (hit type buffer value) is set to “00” and the jackpot type When the type is “first probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “02” and the big hit type is In the case of “third probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “03”, and in the case of the big hit type “fourth probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “04”, ", The big hit type buffer value is set to" 05 ".

  In the starting port buffer, a game ball that has entered any of the starting winning ports is detected among the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The buffer value corresponding to whether it has been stored is stored as the start port buffer value. As an example, when a game ball that has entered the first start winning port is detected by the first start port switch 22A, the start port buffer value is set to "1", and the second start winning port is set by the second start port switch 22B. When a game ball that has entered is detected, the start port buffer value is set to “2”.

  In the game state designation buffer, a buffer value corresponding to whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state, a high probability low base state, or a high accuracy high base state, Stored as a gaming state designation buffer value. As an example, as shown in FIG. 24, the game state designation buffer is composed of two bits, a 0th bit (bit 0) and a 1st bit (bit 1). The 0th bit (bit 0) is “0” (off) in a gaming state including a low base state such as a low probability low base state or a high probability low base state, and the low probability high base state or high probability It is “1” (ON) when the gaming state includes a high base state such as a high base state. The first bit (bit 1) is “0” (off) when the game state includes a low-accuracy state such as a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state. It is “1” (ON) when the gaming state includes a highly probable state such as a state.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission. As an example, the I / O 105 includes an input port IP00 having bit allocation as shown in FIG. In the input port IP00 shown in FIG. 25, the detection signal of the count switch 23 is input to the 0th bit (bit 0), the detection signal of the gate switch 21 is input to the first bit (bit 1), and the sixth bit (bit The detection signal of the second start port switch 22B is input to 6), and the detection signal of the first start port switch 22A is input to the seventh bit (bit 7).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updateable. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 26, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbol determination for promotion effect Random value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance, random values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution Random number SR5, random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type, and random values for determining the first to third sub-notice patterns The numerical data indicating each of SR8-1 to SR8-3, the random number SR10 for determining the effect mode, and the random value SR11 for determining the end of the effect are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 includes these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR10. Any numerical value data indicating all or part of SR11 may be used. For example, the effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 48 to update various numerical data by software. Numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR10, and a part of SR11 Data may be counted. Further, when the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-. 3, numerical data indicating all of SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR10, SR11 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The final stop symbols here are finally stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of promotion effect is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used to determine the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and values in the range of “1” to “101”. Take.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed on each of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is the promotion effect during the change when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. Or a random number value used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns correspond to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “main notice”. It is a random value used to determine the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and values in the range of “1” to “150” are used. Take. The random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, and values in the range of “1” to “60” are used. Take.

  The random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the sub-notice effect, and determines the sub-notice pattern type when executing the sub-notice effect to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. This is a random value used for this purpose, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random values SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third sub-notice patterns are random values used for determining one of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns prepared in advance. As an example, the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern is used to determine the sub-notice pattern in the sub-notice effect of “character display” and has a value in the range of “1” to “499”. Take. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern is used to determine a sub-notice pattern in the sub-notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number SR8-3 for determining the third sub-notice pattern is used to determine a sub-notice pattern in the “mail display” sub-notice effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shifts from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, the random number SR10 for determining the presentation mode is used to change the rendering state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the first rendering mode. It is a random value used for determining whether to set # 1 or the second rendering mode # 2, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The random number SR11 for determining the end of the performance corresponds to the fact that the rendering state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second rendering mode # 2 when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a low probability low base state. Then, it is a random value used for determining whether to end the second effect mode # 2 and shift to the first effect mode # 1, for example, “1” to “100”. Takes a range value.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D is used as a table for determining a predetermined decorative pattern to be one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 27A is a final left symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L among predetermined fixed symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 27B is a final right symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 27C is a final final symbol that is a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed by the “medium” ornament symbol display unit 5C among the fixed ornament symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. 3 is made up of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 27 (B), the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 27C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3 (C), random number values SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are displayed in the portions that become the odd chances TC1 to TC4, and in the portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance symbol TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 27 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C when the specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed. 5R, the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, which are the final decorative symbols, are assigned the development chances HC1 to HC8 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, as tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 30A is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L among the finalized symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a decorative symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 30 (B) is a middle final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C among the finalized decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -3 is a table referred to in order to determine -3 based on the random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value from the symbol number of the decorative symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, variation of decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and “left” → “right” → “ When the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “decorative” decorative symbol display unit 5C that stops displaying the decorative symbol at the end. The left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and then the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used. The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2, which are stopped and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C, is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display portion 5C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, depending on the case of any one of the fluctuation patterns of 5 to super PA3-8. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to “+2”.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 31A to 31C is used as a table for determining a final decorative symbol that is one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163C are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 31 (A) stops at each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination that is a normal jackpot combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “of the normal symbol that is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 31 (B) stops at the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 31 (C) includes the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4 in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. -2 and FZ4-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols as one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. is there. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C as tables for determining any one of a plurality of specific effect patterns. Yes. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 32 (A) slides the specific effect pattern TP1 based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special A random value SR6- for determining the first specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a change pattern of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. 1 is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, By temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols on the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, and then redisplaying the decorative symbols at a high speed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, In the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, and then the decorative symbol display portion 5L of the “left” is made to stop and display again after the decorative symbols are changed again at high speed. In the decorative symbol display unit 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, the “left” and “right” are changed after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol display portion 5R of the “right” is made to stop and display again after the decorative symbols are changed again at a low speed. In the decorative symbol display section 5R, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol display portion 5L of the “left” is made to stop and display again after the decorative symbols are changed again at a low speed. In the decorative symbol display unit 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 32B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super The random value SR6 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, such as the change patterns of PF1-1 and special PG1-3. -2 is made up of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then changed again. The total re-variation display operation to be performed (pseudo-continuous variation) is performed once until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by determining the specific effect pattern to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 using the specific effect pattern determination table 164B, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is determined. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 32C stores the specific effect pattern as the main on the basis of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notice TP3-1 to the main notice TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In accordance with a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, a random number SR6-3 for determining a third specific effect pattern is It is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the notice TP3-1 to the main notice TP3-3.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, the value of the previous effect buffer (previous effect buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 shown in FIG. 48 is “1” to “3”. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is assigned to each specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1 to the main notice TP3-3 corresponding to a plurality of kinds of effect operations. Is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to “1” when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “main notice” is determined as the main notice TP3-1, and “2” when determined as the main notice TP3-2. Is set to “3” when the main notice TP3-3 is determined. When the previous effect buffer value is “1”, the random number value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the main notice TP3-1, and the previous effect buffer value is “2”. When the random number value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the main notice TP3-2 and the previous effect buffer value is “3”, the main notice TP3-3 is set. On the other hand, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned. When the specific effect of “main notice” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, it is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “main notice” executed last time. It is possible to avoid a specific performance pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 33A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 33A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A changes the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution in accordance with whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion effect. Here, when the big hit type is “normal”, “third probability variation”, or “fourth probability variation”, among the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution, “1” to “99”. The value of the range is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect while changing, and the value of “100” is assigned to the determination result without the changing promotion effect while changing. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion failure effect is executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, among the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution, the value in the range of “1” to “70” is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect. The value in the range of “71” to “100” is assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion success during the change and the change promotion during the change Any failure production will not be executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, it is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “fourth probability change”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5 as a jackpot. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion success production or a big hit promotion promotion production. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “fourth probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result with the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect, and the jackpot promotion Failure production will be executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability change” or “second probability change”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the jackpot promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion Both the successful performance and the jackpot promotion failure production will not be executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Assigned to the decision result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary stop symbols shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (D) are used as tables for determining decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a slip / development chance temporary change according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display unit for changing the decorative symbols again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are temporary stop symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is a decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the slip / development chance temporary stop symbol is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “1” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to “8” is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has a decorative symbol symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has a decorative symbol symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4. Contains decision data to be assigned to.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 35A to 35D are used as tables for determining decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. Here, for example, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Becomes “1” when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” when the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed twice before (“pseudo continuous variation”). By the time the pseudo continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and executed is executed, the variation of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, and the temporary display on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be stopped, and selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C Is done. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. When the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. The left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L, and the right temporary stop symbol that is the right symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R. KZ2-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1 or special PG1-3, the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” The left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L, and the right temporary symbol, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R. The stop symbol KZ3-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the “left” ornament The left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped on the symbol display portion 5L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, “ It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed on the “decorative” decorative symbol display portion 5C. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B illustrated in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 35 (A) and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 35 (B) are respectively the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L. The random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2 according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of 3 is determined data assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by the combination of -3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 35C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 35D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 36, the pseudo continuous sequences by the specific effect patterns of the pseudo continuous units TP2-1 to TP2-3. In accordance with the number of executions of the variation, the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at each variation. ~ GC8 can be determined.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 37 is used as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 has a slip / development opportunity according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for time is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. ing.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 38 as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left center right that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination that is a big hit combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of sub-notice pattern types based on the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type. The sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 is a non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. In the case of non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super In the case of any one of PA5-3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, and super PB5-3, the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type is determined depending on the variation pattern other than these variation patterns. For sub-notice or sub-notice CY1 to CY3 sub-notice pattern types, etc. It is configured.

  Here, in the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3. Corresponding to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as Super PB4-3 and Super PB5-3, All numerical values SR7 are assigned without sub-notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, the execution of the effect operation as the sub notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of the “main notice”, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then within a short time. When the effect display in the specific effect is started and the sub-notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170, the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type is assigned so that there is always no sub-notice when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. Thus, it is possible not to execute the sub-notice effect whose execution period overlaps with the specific effect of the “main notice”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, sub-notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 as tables for determining any of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns. When the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY1, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171A has no sub-notice or sub-notice pattern based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notice YP1-1 to the sub notice YP1-4. The sub-notice pattern determination table 171A sets the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern according to the variation pattern without sub-notice or sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1-4. It consists of data for decision to be assigned to.

  Here, in the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1-4, effect display in the sub-notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” sub-notice effect, character images corresponding to the sub-notice patterns SUB1-1 to YP1-4 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  When the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice CY2, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171B has no sub-notice or sub-notice pattern based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern. This table is referred to in order to determine one of the advance notice YP2-1 to the sub advance notice YP2-4. The sub-notice pattern determination table 171B sets the second sub-notice pattern determination random number SR8-2 to the sub-notice pattern of sub-notice YP2-1 to sub-notice YP2-4 according to the variation pattern. It consists of data for decision to be assigned to.

  Here, in the sub-notice patterns SUB2-1 to YP2-4, the effect display in the sub-notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the sub-notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and each of sub-notice YP2-1 to sub-notice YP2-4 is displayed. Corresponding to the sub-notice pattern, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed in a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice CY3, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C has no sub-notice or sub-notice pattern based on the random number SR8-3 for determining the third sub-notice pattern. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notice YP3-1 to the sub notice YP3-3. The sub-notice pattern determination table 171C uses the sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-1 to the sub-notice YP3-3 for the third sub-notice pattern determination random value SR8-3 according to the variation pattern. It consists of data for decision to be assigned to.

  Here, in the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP3-1 to sub-notice YP3-3, the effect display in the sub-notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” sub-notice effect, an effect image prompting the operation of the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then the sub-notice YP 3-1 is operated in response to the operation button 30 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-3, if the operation button 30 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each sub-notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the sub-notice effect of “mail display”, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 30 being operated.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 42, a random value SR8 for determining the third sub-notice pattern corresponding to the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. A value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned without sub-notice. On the other hand, in response to the variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variable display state is the reach state, a smaller number of random values SR8-3 than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 are sub-notices. Assigned to none. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without sub-notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In other variation patterns that reach the reach state, a random value SR8 for determining the third sub-notice pattern is determined depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). -3 assignment is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. , A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without sub-notice. That is, a value in the range of “1” to “190” is assigned without sub-notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared to a variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is a reach state. The ratio of executing the notice effect is low, and the ratio of executing the sub notice effect is high as compared to the case where the change pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific pattern is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. The ratio of executing a sub-notice effect with a high jackpot reliability is higher, while the ratio of executing a sub-notice effect with a higher jackpot reliability than when the variable display form of the decorative pattern is a reachable variation pattern. Becomes lower.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, the rendering state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set as the first rendering mode # 1. As a table for determining whether or not to set the second effect mode # 2, for example, an effect mode determination table 210 shown in FIG. 43 (A) is included. Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 121, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second effect mode # 2, the second effect mode # 2 is ended and the first effect mode # 1 is set. As a table for determining whether or not to perform, for example, an effect end determination table 211 shown in FIG. 43B is included. The effect mode determination table 210 includes data for determination that assigns the random number SR10 for determining the effect mode to the effect change determination value data and the effect end determination value data. The effect end determination table 211 is made up of determination data assigned to the effect end determination random number SR11 for the effect end determination value data and the effect continuation determination value data.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D shown in FIG. Each of the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D is prepared in advance corresponding to each of the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4. For example, the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123 is issued. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls such as the data to be shown, the contents of the sound output control of the speakers 8L, 8R, etc., the contents of the effects by the game effect lamp 9, etc. As an example, each of the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D includes a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 45, a sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 46, and various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. Are respectively included, and depending on whether the production state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first to fourth production modes # 1 to # 4, the production operation in different production modes is made possible. Here, when the effect mode in the effect operation is different, a part of the effect operation may be changed according to the effect state, for example, the background color on the display screen of the image display device 5 is changed. Then, for example, the whole of the effect operation may be changed according to the effect state, such as changing the entire image data used for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5 to be completely different. . As another example, each of the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D includes a symbol variation control pattern table 180 and a sub-notice effect control pattern table 181, while the various effect control pattern tables 182 include the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D. May be provided separately. In this case, the effect operation during the variable display of the decorative design may be different depending on whether the effect state is the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4. On the other hand, the production operations in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are not limited to any one of the first to fourth production modes # 1 to # 4. Based on the production control pattern stored in the, the same production mode may be used. Alternatively, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 is also provided separately from the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D, so that the effect operation in the sub-notice effect is performed in the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to ##. Regardless of which of the four, it may be the same production mode.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 45, the ornament symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbols starts until the final ornament symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, and the effect display operation in the specific effect as the symbol variation control pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effects according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series. It should be noted that in the symbol variation control pattern table 180, only a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of a predetermined effect operation related to variable display of decorative symbols may be stored as symbol variation control patterns. In this case, for example, the control content of the rendering operation not related to the variable display of the decorative design, such as the display operation of the rendering image superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative design regardless of the variation pattern. A plurality of types of data may be stored as predetermined presentation control patterns in a predetermined control pattern table different from the symbol variation control pattern table.

  The sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 46 shows the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the sub-notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the sub-notice effect, corresponding to each of the plural types of sub-notice effects. A plurality of types of data may be stored as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern corresponding to the sub notice effect includes various effect operations according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is only necessary to set various contents of the effect control, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like in time series. The notice effect control pattern for executing the sub notice effect is included in the symbol variation control pattern stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 as indicating the content of the effect operation related to the variable display of the decorative symbol. You may comprise.

  As an example, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 includes sub-notice CYP1-1 to sub-notice CYP1-4 notice effect controls corresponding to the sub-notice patterns YP1-1 to YP1-4. A pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-1 displays the character image MC101 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-2 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-3 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-4 displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-4.

  In addition, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 includes sub-notice CYP2-1 to sub-notice CYP2-4 notice effect control patterns corresponding to the sub-notice patterns YP2-1 to YP2-4. Is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-1, and the sub notice is not performed without switching the effect image. The production ends. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-2, and ends the sub notice effect without switching the effect image. To do. The notice effect control pattern of the sub-notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub-notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-3 and switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step. The sub notice effect is finished. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and After switching to the effect image of the third step, the sub notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the sub-notice CYP3-1-1 and the sub-notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-1. Sub notice CYP3-2-1 and sub notice CYP3-2-2 notice effect control patterns are stored corresponding to the sub notice YP3-2 sub notice pattern, and corresponding to the sub notice YP3-3 sub notice pattern. The notice effect control patterns of the sub notice CYP3-3-1 and the sub notice CYP3-3-2 are stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-2-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. The contents of various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 48 is provided in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The RAM 122 is a non-backup RAM that is not backed up by a backup power supply, unlike the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. That is, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is a volatile storage device whose stored contents disappear when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 48 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. As an example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with an effect mode designation buffer. In the effect mode designation buffer, a buffer value corresponding to any of the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4 in the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored as an effect mode designation buffer value. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode designation buffer is composed of two bits, the 0th bit (bit 0) and the 1st bit (bit 1). The 0th bit (bit 0) is “0” (off) when any of the first and third effect modes # 1, # 3, and the second and fourth effect modes # 2, When it is any of # 4, it is “1” (ON). The first bit (bit 1) is “0” (off) when one of the first and second effect modes # 1 and # 2, and the third and fourth effect modes # 3 and # 4. "1" (ON) when any of the above.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. When the game control main process shown in FIG. 50 is started, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  That is, after setting the interrupt prohibition (step S1), the CPU 103 sets the interrupt mode to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and sets the stack pointer designation address to the stack pointer (step S3). Here, the CPU 103 used in this embodiment has three types of interrupt modes 0 to 2 as shown below as maskable interrupt (INT) modes. . When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  In interrupt mode 0, the built-in device that has issued the interrupt request sends an RST instruction (1 byte) or a CALL instruction (3 bytes) onto the internal data bus of the CPU 103. Therefore, the CPU 103 executes an instruction at an address corresponding to the RST instruction or an address specified by the CALL instruction. At reset, the CPU 103 automatically enters interrupt mode 0. Therefore, when setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2, it is necessary to perform processing for setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2 in the initial setting process.

  The interrupt mode 1 is a mode that always jumps to address 0038H when an interrupt is accepted. In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device indicates the interrupt address. Mode. That is, the interrupt address is an address indicated by 2 bytes in which the upper address is the value of the specific register and the lower address is the interrupt vector. Therefore, an interrupt process can be set at an arbitrary address (although it is skipped). Each built-in device has a function of sending an interrupt vector when making an interrupt request. Therefore, when the interrupt mode 2 is set, it becomes possible to easily process an interrupt request from each built-in device, and it is possible to install an interrupt process at an arbitrary position in the program. . Furthermore, unlike interrupt mode 1, it is also easy to prepare each interrupt process for each interrupt generation factor. As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 is set to the interrupt mode 2 in step S2 of the game control main process.

  Following the processing in step S3, the CPU 103 sets (initializes) the built-in device register (step S4). Also, after setting (initializing) the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) (step S5), the RAM 102 is set to an accessible state (step S5). Step S6).

  Then, for example, the state of the output signal in the clear switch mounted on the power supply board is confirmed (step S7). At this time, if the output signal from the clear switch is off (step S7; No), the data protection processing of the RAM 102 is performed when the power supply is stopped by checking whether the backup flag is on. It is confirmed whether or not (step S8). In this embodiment, when an unexpected power supply stop occurs, processing for protecting data in the RAM 102 is performed. When such protection processing is performed, it is assumed that there is a backup. The state of the backup flag is set in the game control flag setting unit 152 of the RAM 102 when power supply is stopped. In this embodiment, since all of the RAM 102 is backed up by the backup power source, the contents of the game control flag setting unit 152 are saved even when the power supply is stopped. In step S8, for example, if “55H” is set in the backup RAM area as the value of the backup flag, it is determined that there is a backup (ON state). On the other hand, if a value other than “55H” is set, it is determined that there is no backup (OFF state).

  When the backup flag is on in step S8 (step S8; Yes), data check of the RAM 102 is performed to determine whether the check result is normal (step S9). For example, the CPU 103 calculates a checksum using data stored in a specific area of the RAM 102, and compares the calculated checksum with the checksum stored in the checksum buffer. Here, the checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. If the comparison results do not match, the data in the specific area of the RAM 102 is different from the data at the time of stopping the power supply, and therefore it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  In the case of recovery after an unexpected power supply stop, since the data in the RAM 102 should have been saved, the check result becomes normal. If the check result is normal (step S9; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power is turned off (step S10).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on in step S7 (step S7; Yes), if the backup flag is off in step S8 (step S8; No), or check result in step S9 Is not normal (step S9; No), initialization processing corresponding to power-on that is not at the time of power failure recovery is executed.

  In this initialization process, first, a clear process of the RAM 102 is executed (step S11). In the process of step S11, predetermined data (for example, stored data in a random counter for generating numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result) is initialized to “0”. It may be initialized to a value of or a predetermined value. Also, the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Also, setting processing such as setting an initial value for a predetermined work area in the RAM 102 is performed (step S12). By the processing in step S12, for example, initial values may be set in the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like. Then, an initial display designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S13). At this time, a control command (initialization designation command) for initializing a sub board other than the effect control board 12 (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted) may be transmitted. In the effect control board 12, when the initial display designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5. Initialization notification such as displaying an image for notifying that the control in 1 is initialized is performed.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S14). In the process of step S14, the CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update numerical data indicating various random number values, for example, by executing a random number circuit setting program. Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms (step S13). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. As a result, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 generates a timer interrupt every 2 ms.

  When the initialization process as described above is completed, the CPU 103 executes a loop process that repeats the processes of steps S16 to S18. In this loop process, after being set to the interrupt disabled state (step S16), the random number update process is executed (step S17), and when the execution of the random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S18). In the random number update process in step S17, for example, numerical data indicating various random values counted by a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, such as numerical data indicating a part of the random value shown in FIG. Updated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S10 shown in FIG. 50 as the gaming state restoration processing. In the gaming state restoration process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 103 first performs a stack pointer restoration process (step S31). The value of the stack pointer is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 to be backed up in a power supply stop process (FIG. 53) described later. For this reason, in the process of step S31, the stored value of the area is set in the stack pointer to return. Note that the register value in the CPU 103 and the value of the program counter (PC) when the power supply is stopped may be saved in the area (stack area) pointed to by the restored stack pointer.

  Following the process of step S31, a power failure recovery designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S32). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the backup flag (step S33), and turns off the flag indicating that a predetermined storage protection process has been executed at the previous power supply stop. Thereby, unnecessary information can be prevented from remaining after the control state is restored. In addition, the saved values of various registers are read from the stack area and set in various registers in the CPU 103 (for example, IX register, HL register, DE register, BC register, etc.) to restore the register values (step S34). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the parity flag is turned on (step S35). When the parity flag is turned off (step S35; No), an interrupt permission state is set (step S36). On the other hand, when the parity flag is on (step S35; Yes), the processing of step S36 is not executed and the interrupt disabled state is set. Subsequently, the AF register (accumulator and flag register in the CPU 103) is restored from the stack area (step S37). Subsequently, a reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S38). In the process of step S38, the I / O 105 includes control data that can specify the total number of pending storages, which is the number of pending data counted by the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Set to a predetermined output port. After the game state restoration process is completed in this manner, for example, according to the value of the program counter restored by the process of step S34 based on the process of step S31, the process executed when the power supply was stopped last time may be restored. .

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, when the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52 is executed. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power supply stop process (step S51). In the power supply stop process, for example, it is determined whether or not the power supply is stopped by checking the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board, and the storage protection process of the RAM 102 is executed when the power supply is stopped. The When the process returns from the power supply stop process, a predetermined switch process is executed to determine the state of the detection signal transmitted from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110 ( Step S52). Subsequently, by performing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S53). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S54).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4 and the like used on the main board 11 side by software is executed. (Step S55). The main-side random number update process executed in step S55 may be a process for updating the same numerical data as the random number update process executed in step S17 shown in FIG. 50, or in step S17. It may be a process of updating a part of the numerical data to be updated, or a process of updating more numerical data than the numerical data updated in step S17. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S56). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S57). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S58). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command table specified by the stored value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. For example, by changing the state from the off state to the off state, the effect control command based on the setting in the command table can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 one by one, for example, corresponding to one timer interrupt. . The number of effect control commands that can be transmitted in response to one timer interrupt is arbitrary. For example, a plurality of effect control commands (all effect controls corresponding to the command table specified by the stored value of the transmission command buffer). Command) may be transmitted, or one presentation control command may be transmitted in response to a plurality of (for example, two) timer interruptions.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined solenoid output process, whereby a solenoid 81 for tilting the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 A solenoid drive signal for the solenoid 82 for opening and closing the open / close plate is output via the solenoid circuit 111 (step S59). Thereafter, by executing predetermined prize ball processing, the number of prize balls is set based on the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, etc. A payout control command can be output to the control board (step S60). When the award ball processing is thus completed, the game control timer interrupt processing is ended after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S51 illustrated in FIG. 52 as the power supply stop process. In the power supply stop process shown in FIG. 53, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a decrease in the power supply voltage is detected, for example, by checking the state of the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board (step S71). ). At this time, if a decrease in the power supply voltage is not detected (step S71; No), the power supply stop process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the game control interrupt process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when a drop in power supply voltage is detected (step S71; Yes), the AF register (accumulator and flag register in the CPU 103) is saved in a predetermined saving area provided in the RAM 102 (step S72). . Subsequently, an interrupt flag indicating whether the CPU 103 is in an interrupt disabled state or an interrupt enabled state is copied to the parity flag (step S73). Since the parity flag is provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 of the RAM 102, the contents are saved even if the power supply is stopped.

  Thereafter, the values held in the internal registers of the CPU 103 such as the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, and the IX register are saved in the stack area provided in the RAM 102 (step S74). Following this, the value of the stack pointer is also saved in the stack area provided in the RAM 102 (step S75). Next, the backup flag is set to the on state by setting the value of the backup flag to “55H”, for example (step S76).

  Then, check data is created, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a specific area of the RAM 102 (step S77). The check data created in this way is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as a checksum buffer of the RAM 102 (step S78). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets an access prohibition value in a predetermined RAM access register (step S79), and thereafter suspends access to the RAM 102. As a result, even if a program runaway occurs due to the stop of power supply, the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be prevented from being damaged. Further, the CPU 103 executes a clear process such as setting “00” as clear data to a predetermined output port included in the I / O 105 (step S80), and then enters a standby state (loop process).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S56 shown in FIG. 52 as special symbol process processing. In this embodiment, the special symbol process is used for both the first special figure and the second special figure. That is, the special symbol process is a process for controlling the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B by a common processing routine. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning process (step S101). 55 and 56 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning process.

  In this start winning process, the CPU 103 first detects the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A (start winning prize), and a normal variable winning ball. A detection signal transmitted from at least one of the second start port switches 22B for detecting that a game ball has entered (start winning) the second start winning port formed by the device 6B is in an ON state. Whether or not at least one of the first start prize and the second start prize has occurred is executed. More specifically, the data of the input port IP00 shown in FIG. 25 is read and loaded into, for example, a predetermined area of the register or RAM 102 (step S201 in FIG. 55). Then, the bitwise AND operation of the loaded contents (load result) and C0H is performed, and it is determined whether or not the operation result is “0” (step S202). Alternatively, for example, when it is determined that the calculation result is not “0” in the previous determination and the calculation result is “0” in the current determination, a determination that the calculation result is not “0” is performed. You may be made to be. Here, the hexadecimal decision data C0H used for the logical product operation indicates a value corresponding to the input bit of the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B at the input port IP00. Yes. The contents of the input port IP00 are not limited to those directly loaded. For example, the contents of the input port IP00 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 by switch processing (step S52 in FIG. 52). You may make it load the content. In the process of step S202, after the 0th bit (bit 0) to the 5th bit (bit 5) of the load result are masked (set to “0”), an operation for obtaining an exclusive OR with 00H is performed. You may do it.

  If the calculation result is “0” in step S202 (step S202; Yes), the start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, when the operation result is not “0” (step S202; No), it is determined whether or not the sixth bit (bit 6) of the load result is “1” (step S203). As shown in FIG. 25, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the sixth bit (bit 6) of the load result is “1”. That is, when the sixth bit (bit 6) of the load result is “1”, the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state. When the sixth bit (bit 6) of the load result is not “1”, the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state.

  If it is determined in step S203 that the value is “1” (step S203; Yes), the value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (start port buffer value) is set to “2”. Set (step 204). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S203 that it is not “1” (step S203; No), the start port buffer value is set to “1” (step S205).

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 reads the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S206). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the value of the first reserved memory number counter (first reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is “ If “2”, the value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (second reserved memory number count value) is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S206 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S207).

  If it is determined in step S207 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value (step S207; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S208). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) indicating the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S209). ).

  Following the processing of step S209, the CPU 103 sets and stores start data corresponding to the start port buffer value at the head of the empty area in the start data storage unit 151C (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, start data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, start data indicating “second” is set. Then, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. (Step S211). At this time, the numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in step S211 is stored as reserved data at the head of the empty area in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponding to the start port buffer value. By being set, each random value is stored (step S212). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. Pending data is set.

  After executing the process of step S212, a setting for transmitting a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S213). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address (first address) of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address (head address) of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S58 shown in FIG. 52 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done. Then, for example, the CPU 103 stores the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc. Is set to transmit (step S214). The first start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command. When the second start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the pending storage number notification command As the processing of steps S213 and S214, only the storage address of the command table corresponding to the start port buffer value of the first start port winning designation command table and the second start port winning designation command table is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer do it. For example, the reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed by executing the command control process in step S58 shown in FIG. 52 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example, and so on. Subsequent to the mouth winning designation command, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S207 (step S207; Yes), the upper limit flag corresponding to the start port buffer value is set to the on state (step S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first upper limit flag is set to the on state, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second upper limit value flag is set to the on state.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S214 and S215, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is “2” (step S216). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S216; Yes), it is determined whether or not the seventh bit (bit 7) of the load result in step S201 is “1” (step S217). . At this time, if the seventh bit (bit 7) of the load result is “1” (step S217; Yes), the process proceeds to step S205. As a result, when both the sixth bit (bit 6) and the seventh bit (bit 7) of the load result are “1”, that is, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B are simultaneously turned on. When the state is reached, the first start port corresponding to the seventh bit (bit 7) is immediately executed after the processing of steps S206 to S215 is executed for the second start port switch 22B corresponding to the sixth bit (bit 6). The process of steps S206 to S215 can be executed for the switch 22A.

  In this embodiment, when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B are turned on at the same time, both the switches are turned on by the process executed within 2 ms. A process based on that is executed. Thereby, for example, even when a situation occurs in which the detection signal transmitted from the switch that has detected the game ball is in an on state for a very short period, the processing based on the fact that the switch is in the on state can be reliably completed. . In addition, the processing of steps S206 to S215 is completed based on the fact that both switches are turned on within 2 ms (within one game control timer interrupt processing). Numeric data indicating a random value is extracted before being updated. Therefore, an accurate software random number value corresponding to the winning timing can be extracted.

  When it is determined in step S216 that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S216; No), or when it is determined in step S217 that the seventh bit (bit 7) is not “1”. (Step S217; No), it is determined whether both the sixth bit (bit 6) and the seventh bit (bit 7) of the load result in step S201 are “1” (step S218 in FIG. 56). . At this time, if at least one of the sixth bit (bit 6) and the seventh bit (bit 7) is not “1” (step S218; No), the start port buffer value is “2”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S219). If the start port buffer value is “2” (step S219; Yes), it is determined whether or not the sixth bit (bit 6) of the load result in step S201 of FIG. 55 is “1” (step S219). S220). Here, in the processing of steps S203 and S204 in FIG. 55, the start port buffer value is set to “2” corresponding to the sixth bit (bit 6) being “1”. Therefore, if the start port buffer value is “2”, it is normal that the sixth bit (bit 6) is “1”.

  If it is determined in step S220 that the sixth bit (bit 6) is not “1” (step S220; No), the determination result in step S203 in FIG. 55 matches the load result and the start port buffer value. Since this is not done, the setting for redoing the determination in step S203 is performed. At this time, it is determined whether or not the second upper limit flag is on (step S221). If it is off (step S221; No), the second reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are obtained. 1 is subtracted (step S222). Further, in the process of step S222, for example, by erasing the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer and the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table, etc. The command transmission setting performed in steps S213 and S214 in FIG. 55 may be canceled. More specifically, first, the value of the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer is decremented by 1, and the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer after the subtraction is cleared, thereby storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table Erase. Thereafter, the value of the transmission command pointer is further subtracted by 1 and the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer after the subtraction is cleared, thereby erasing the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table. If the second start slot winning designation command table also includes setting data for transmitting the pending storage number notification command, the process of clearing the corresponding buffer area by subtracting 1 from the value of the transmission command pointer It only needs to be executed once.

  If the start port buffer value is not “2” in step S219 (step S219; No), whether the seventh bit (bit 7) of the load result in step S201 in FIG. 55 is “1” or not. Is determined (step S223). Here, in the processing of steps S203 and S205 of FIG. 55, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in response to the sixth bit (bit 6) not being “1”. 55, it is determined that the result of the logical product operation between the load result and C0H is not “0”. Therefore, if the start port buffer value is “1”, the seventh bit (bit It is normal that 7) is “1”.

  If it is determined in step S223 that the seventh bit (bit 7) is not “1” (step S223; No), the determination result in step S203 of FIG. 55 matches the load result and the start port buffer value. Since this is not done, the setting for redoing the determination in step S203 is performed. At this time, it is determined whether or not the first upper limit flag is on (step S224). If it is off (step S224; No), the first reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are obtained. 1 is subtracted (step S225). Further, in the process of step S225, for example, the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table stored in the transmission command buffer and the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table are erased. The command transmission setting performed in steps S213 and S214 may be canceled. More specifically, first, the value of the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer is decremented by 1, and the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer after the subtraction is cleared, thereby storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table Erase. Thereafter, the value of the transmission command pointer is further subtracted by 1 and the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer after the subtraction is cleared, thereby erasing the storage address of the first start opening prize designation command table. When the first start opening winning designation command table also includes setting data for transmitting the pending storage number notification command, a process of clearing the corresponding buffer area by subtracting 1 from the value of the transmission command pointer It only needs to be executed once.

  If the second upper limit flag is on in step 221 (step S221; Yes), if the first upper limit flag is on in step S224 (step S224; Yes), or steps S222 and S225 After executing one of the processes, the start port buffer is cleared (step S226), the upper limit flag is cleared (step S227), and the process returns to step S201 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S218 that both the sixth bit (bit 6) and the seventh bit (bit 7) are “1” (step S218; Yes), the sixth bit ( If it is determined that bit 6) is “1” (step S220; Yes), or if it is determined in step S223 that the seventh bit (bit 7) is “1” (step S223). Yes), the correspondence between the load result and the start port buffer value is normal, and the determination result in step S203 of FIG. 55 matches the load result and the start port buffer value, so the start port buffer is cleared. At the same time (step S228), after clearing the upper limit flag (step S229), the start winning process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S203 of FIG. 55 based on the detection signal input to the input port IP00. Thereafter, when it is determined by the determination in step S220 of FIG. 56 or the determination in step S223 that the determination result in step S203 is not consistent with the load result or the start port buffer value, the process in step S203 is performed. Try again. Thereby, it is reliably determined which of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B has detected the game ball. For example, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A when the first reserved memory number reaches an upper limit (eg, “4”), the start winning by the game ball is invalidated. Is normal. However, if it is determined in step S203 of FIG. 55 that the start winning is erroneously detected by the second start port switch 22B, the second reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit value. In Steps S208 to S214 of 55, the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, and the process is considered to be effective start winning to the second start winning opening. In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S218 to S227 in FIG. 56, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which a valid start prize is erroneously generated although it should not be a valid start prize. Can be reduced.

  Note that the determination in step S203 in FIG. 55 need not be repeated. In this case, it is only necessary to proceed to the process of step S228 without executing the processes of steps S218 to S227 of FIG. Thereby, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where the determination in step S203 of FIG. 55 can be repeated. In addition, in order to prevent the situation in which the determination in step S203 in FIG. 55 is repeated indefinitely, after the determination in step S203 is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the sixth bit ( Even when it is determined that bit 6) is not “1” or when the seventh bit (bit 7) is determined not to be “1” in step S223, the processing in steps S221 and S222 and steps S224 and S225 are performed. After executing the process, the process proceeds to the process of step S228 and the start winning process may be terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the determination in step S203 of FIG. 55 is repeated indefinitely due to the influence of noise or the like, and the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not proceed.

  Alternatively, even if the determination in step S203 is performed only once, it is determined in step S220 in FIG. 56 that the sixth bit (bit 6) is not “1”, or the seventh bit in step S223. When it is determined that (bit 7) is not “1”, the process of steps S221 and S222 and the processes of steps S224 and S225 are executed, and then the process proceeds to the process of step S228 to finish the start winning process. Also good. Storage of holding data in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B corresponding to the second holding memory number count value before subtraction in step S222, or the first holding memory number count value before subtraction in step S225 Storage of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to, and start data in the start data storage unit 151C corresponding to the total hold storage number count value before being subtracted in any of steps S222, S225 Will be overwritten with new start-up data and pending data when the processing of steps S210 and S212 in FIG. 55 is executed next time. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S221 in FIG. 56 that the second upper limit flag is off, the hold corresponding to the second hold memory count value is performed before executing the process in step S222. The data storage may be erased, and the start data storage corresponding to the total pending storage number count value may be erased. If it is determined in step S224 that the first upper limit flag is off, the pending data corresponding to the first pending memory count value is erased before executing the process of step S225, You may make it erase | eliminate the memory | storage of the starting data corresponding to a total pending | holding memory | storage number count value.

  In such a start winning process, at least one of the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A and the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is turned on by the processing of steps S201 and S202 in FIG. It is determined whether or not. That is, at least one of the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure and the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is Whether or not it has occurred is determined by a common processing routine. If it is determined in step S202 that at least one of the starting conditions has occurred, the processing from steps S203 to S205 in FIG. 55 corresponds to the detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A being on. Then, the start port buffer value is set to “1”, and the start port buffer value is set to “2” in response to the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B being in the ON state. Thereafter, in the processing of steps S206 to S215, setting and processing according to the start port buffer value are performed. That is, based on the determination that at least one of the first start condition and the second start condition has occurred, it is specified which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. At the same time, settings and processes corresponding to the specified starting conditions are executed by a common processing routine. As described above, the processes in steps S203 to S215 are start-up processes such as specifying which start condition is satisfied in the common process routine.

  After the start winning process as described above is executed in step S101 shown in FIG. 54, any one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal processing, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol or the like is set to “big hit” or “small bonus” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. A determination is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the finalized special symbol (big hit symbol, Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a pre-decision result on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, a reach decision result on whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, etc. The process includes determining a variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and determining a variation pattern as a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the value (special diagram variation timer value) in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by one or added by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game according to a common processing routine. When the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag is set. The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of big prize opening times. As an example, when the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15 round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This processing during opening of the big winning opening is based on processing for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the solenoid drive signal with respect to the solenoid 82 should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit. For example, when the number of executions of the round in the big hit gaming state corresponding to any of “first probability change” to “third probability change” for the big hit type reaches the maximum number of open big opening, the CPU 103 Make settings for sending the end command. Thereby, before the end of the jackpot gaming state, when an effect operation is performed in which the player can recognize that the gaming state including the highly accurate state is achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the effect control is performed from the main board 11. After the jackpot gaming state is finished for the board 12, the rendering state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is designated to be controlled to the fourth rendering mode # 4 corresponding to the gaming state being a highly accurate base state. it can. Also, for example, when the number of round executions in the big hit gaming state corresponding to either “normal” or “fourth probability variation” of the big hit type reaches the maximum number of big winning opening, the second hit end designation command is transmitted. Set up to do. As a result, before the end of the big hit gaming state, in the case where an effect operation is performed in which it is not possible to recognize whether or not the player will enter a gaming state including a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends, the main board 11 After the jackpot gaming state is finished for the stage control board 12, the stage state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to whether the gaming state is one of the high probability high base state and the low probability high base state. It can be specified to control to the third production mode # 3. Further, for example, when the number of executions of the round in the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” reaches the maximum value of the number of big winning opening, the setting for transmitting the third hit end designation command is performed. As a result, the main board 11 notifies the effect control board 12 that the two-round big hit state is finished, and it can be specified to control the effect state corresponding to the end of the two round big hit state.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the maximum value of the number of times that the big prize opening is opened is “0” because the variable display result is “small hit”, and the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened is set to “0. “5 seconds” may be set.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes determining whether or not the number of times that the big prize opening has been opened by the variable winning action has reached the maximum number of times the big prize opening is open, In this case, a process for performing a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command is included. At this time, if the number of times that the grand prize opening is in the open state has not reached the maximum value of the number of big prize opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” or “9”, for example. The mouth may be opened again. Then, for example, when the number of times that the big winning opening is opened in the small hit gaming state reaches the maximum value of the number of big winning openings, a setting for transmitting the fourth winning end designation command is performed. As a result, the main board 11 notifies the effect control board 12 that the small hit gaming state is ended, and it can be specified to control the effect state corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state. After that, it waits until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9. Processing to perform is performed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the gaming state designation buffer value.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 57, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the first reserved memory count. It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the second reserved memory numbers is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total pending storage number count value is other than “0” (step S231; No), start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  In this embodiment, the first start condition and the second start condition are not distinguished from each other, and it is assumed that the special game corresponding to the previously established start condition is executed sequentially. On the other hand, for example, on the condition that the second reserved memory number is not “0”, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. You may do it. In this case, for example, if the total reserved memory number count value is other than “0” in step S231, it is determined whether or not the second reserved memory number count value is “0”. If the second reserved storage number count value is “0”, the same processing as when the start data indicating “first” is read from the start data storage unit 151C is executed, while the second hold If the stored number count value is other than “0”, the same process as when the start data indicating “second” is read from the start data storage unit 151C may be executed. Alternatively, it is determined which of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is larger, and priority is given to a special game using a special symbol corresponding to the person with the larger reserved memory number. You may make it perform. In this case, for example, if the total reserved memory number count value is other than “0” in step S231, the first reserved memory number count value is compared with the second reserved memory number count value. When the first reserved storage number count value is larger, the same processing as when the start data indicating “first” is read from the start data storage unit 151C is executed, while the second hold When the stored number count value is larger, the same process as when the start data indicating “second” is read from the start data storage unit 151C may be executed. At this time, if the first reserved memory number count value matches the second reserved memory number count value, the special game using the first special figure may be preferentially executed, or the second special figure may be executed. A special game using the game may be preferentially executed. In this way, by giving priority to the special figure game using the special symbol corresponding to the person with the larger number of reserved memories, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number count value, the total reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C receives the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). And hold data is read from the special figure reservation memory | storage part according to the starting data read in step S232 (step S234). For example, when the start data is “first”, as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a random value for determining the special figure display result The numerical data indicating MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S234, 1 is subtracted from the reserved memory number count value corresponding to the start data, and an entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “ The stored contents of the pending data stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S235). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored content of the held data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top. Thereafter, the variable special figure designation buffer corresponding to the start data is set (step S236). In the process of step S236, for example, as shown in FIG. 58A, if the start data is “first”, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “1”, while the start data is “second”. If so, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2”.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S236, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the start data is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. Select and set (step S237). For example, if the start data is “first”, the special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A is set as the usage table, while if the start data is “second”, FIG. 9B. The special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this manner, and the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random value MR1 read in step S234 matches the jackpot determination value data. It is determined whether or not (step S238).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit decision value data in step S238 (step S238; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S239). ). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S240). Based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type read in step S234, the jackpot type is set to “normal” by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S240. Of the multiple types of “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability”, one of the big hit types is determined (step S241). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S236, the big hit type determination random number MR2-1 for the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determination table 131. Is not assigned, the jackpot type will not be determined as “surprising”. In this way, the big hit type buffer value is set to any one of “00” to “05” corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S241 (step S242).

  If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S238 (step S238; No), the numerical value indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S234. It is determined whether or not the data matches the loss determination value data (step S243). At this time, if it does not coincide with the loss determination value data (step S243; No), the small hit flag is set to the on state (step S244).

  After executing one of the processes of step S242 and step S244, the maximum value of the number of winning prize openings is set (step S245). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), if the big hit type is any one of “normal” and “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is opened 15 times. Set to “15” corresponding to the game. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” or the small hit type is “small hit”, the maximum value of the number of big winning opening is set to “2” corresponding to the two-time open game. To do.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the loss determination value data in step S243 (step S243; Yes), after executing the processing of step S245, the determination result of the variable display result and the determination result of the jackpot type Corresponding to the above, a confirmed special symbol is set (step S246). As an example, when the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1 matches the loss determination value data in step S243, the loss pattern corresponding to the predetermination result that the variable display result is “loss” is obtained. The special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit decision value data in step S238, “1”, “3”, which become big hit symbols, according to the big hit type decision result in step S241. , One of the special symbols indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 does not match the loss determination value data in step S243, a small hit symbol is obtained corresponding to the predetermined determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S246, the in-demonstration flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is cleared and turned off (step S247). The in-demo flag is set to an on state when a process in step S252 described later is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S248), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S231 that the total pending storage count value is “0” (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo flag is on (step S249). At this time, if the demo flag is on (step S249; Yes), the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, if the demonstration flag is OFF in step S249 (step S249; No), a customer waiting demonstration designation command and a background designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Setting is performed (steps S250 and S251). For example, in the process of step S250, the storage address of the customer waiting demo designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the value of the transmission command pointer is incremented by one. Thereafter, in the process of step S251, the storage address of the background designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the value of the transmission command pointer is incremented by one. When the customer waiting demo designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command and setting data for transmitting the background designation command, step S250, As the processing of S251, only the storage address of the customer waiting demo designation command table may be stored in the buffer area in the transmission command buffer. The setting data for transmitting the background designation command may include data for determining the EXT data in the background designation command by referring to the game state designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, for example. That's fine. The customer waiting demonstration designation command and the background designation command set in this way are produced from the main board 11 sequentially, for example, by executing the command control process in step S58 shown in FIG. 52 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the control board 12.

  As a result of the settings in steps S250 and S251, after the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols are finished, the first start condition and the second start condition are not satisfied, so the total number of reserved memories is On the condition that it is “0”, the customer waiting demonstration designation command can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, in response to transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a background designation command for designating a background according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Can do. After executing the process of step S251, the demo flag is set to ON (step S252), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Note that when it is determined in step S249 that the demo flag is OFF, the process is not limited to the one that immediately executes the processing of steps S250 and S251 and transmits the customer waiting demo designation command or the background designation command. When the state where the middle flag is off continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the processing of steps S250 and S251 may be executed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command and the background designation command. For example, if it is determined in step S249 that the demo flag is OFF, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value has reached a timer determination value corresponding to a predetermined time. If the game control process timer value has not reached the timer determination value, the game control process timer value is updated by adding 1 or the like, and then the special symbol normal is performed without executing the processing of steps S250 to S252. The process ends. In contrast, if the game control process timer value has reached the timer determination value, the game control process timer is cleared and the timer value is initialized to “0”, and then the process proceeds to step S250. do it.

  In such special symbol normal processing, it is determined in step S231 whether or not the total reserved memory count value is “0”. That is, one of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure occurs. Is determined by a common processing routine. If it is determined in step S231 that any one of the start conditions has occurred, after starting data is read in step S232, the processing in steps S233 to S237 is performed in accordance with the starting data read in step S232. Settings and processing are performed. That is, based on the determination that one of the first start condition and the second start condition has occurred, it is specified which one of the first start condition and the second start condition has occurred, and Settings and processing corresponding to the start conditions are executed by a common processing routine. Further, in the processing of steps S232 to S246, based on the settings and processing in steps S232 to S237, whether or not the variable display result is set to “big hit” in the processing of steps S238 to S246 to control the big hit gaming state, whether or not the big hit type The common processing routine determines whether or not to control the gaming state including the highly probable state after the big hit gaming state by setting any one of “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”. ing. That is, the processing of steps S232 to S246 is a pre-determining process for determining whether to control the big hit gaming state or whether to control the high probability state in a common processing routine.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 59, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of the low probability low base state, the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy low base state, and the high accuracy high base state. Based on the table selection setting shown in FIG. 12D, any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Select and set (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified from the gaming state designation buffer value provided in the gaming control buffer setting unit 155.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a low probability low base state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy low base state, or a high accuracy high base state. Based on which one of the variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C for small hits is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. Is selected and set (step S264).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S263 (step S263; No), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state, a high probability low base state, a high accuracy high. Reach determination tables 134A to 134A are used as tables used to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. One of 134C is selected and set (step S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Based on the reach determination random number MR2-2 extracted in step S267, the presence / absence of the reach state is determined by referring to any of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S265 (step S265). S268).

  If a reach determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to each determination result in the reach state such as the determination results of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S268. As the usage table, any one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C is selected and set (step S270). On the other hand, when the reach determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1 in step S268. -1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the use to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to each determination result without reach state As the table, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C is selected and set (step S271).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. Either one is determined (step S273).

  After the change pattern type is determined in step S273, as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of change patterns based on the determination result of the change pattern type, FIG. 17, FIG. One of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in (B) and loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 is selected and set (step S274). . Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S274 (step S276). .

  Subsequent to the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, a special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S277). For example, in the process of step S277, the CPU 103 specifies the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern by referring to a predetermined fluctuation pattern table stored in advance in the ROM 101, and the specified special figure fluctuation time. The corresponding timer initial value is set in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. In this case, every time the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 54 is executed, for example, the special symbol variation timer value is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the value becomes “0”. Then, it may be determined that the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation has reached the special symbol variation time. Alternatively, in the process of step S277, “0” may be set as the timer initial value by clearing the special figure fluctuation timer, and a special figure fluctuation end determination value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time may be set. In this case, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 54 is executed, for example, the value of the special symbol variation timer is updated to be incremented by 1, and the value reaches the special diagram variation end determination value. In this case, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol has reached the special symbol change time. Thus, a common special figure variation timer is used for the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is possible to measure the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol.

  After the special figure variation time is set in step S277, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device according to the variable special figure designation buffer value. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special diagram according to 4B (step S278). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure to the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure to the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S278 is executed, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the special symbol fluctuation. That is, as the command table for change start according to the change special figure designation buffer value, when the change special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first change start command table 200A shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second variation start command table 200B shown in FIG. 21B is set (step S279). Then, settings are made to transmit various effect control commands corresponding to the change start command table set in step S279 from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S280). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table 200A set in step S279 is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table 200B set in step S279 is determined by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the specified buffer area. When the setting in step S280 is performed, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, the command control process in step S58 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the background designation command are sequentially transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Become. Note that the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted is arbitrary. For example, after the background designation command is first transmitted, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification You may make it transmit in order of a command.

  By such setting in step S280, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A, a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B, and further, In response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, a background designation command corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Can do. After executing the process of step S280, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S281), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In such variation pattern setting processing, in steps S261 to S271, the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the first special figure game for starting the second special figure are used. Based on the fact that either one of the two start conditions is satisfied, a use table for determining a variation pattern type from a plurality of types by a common processing routine is selected from among a plurality of types of variation pattern type determination tables. Select and set. Thereafter, in steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the numerical value data indicating the common random number value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type is used to change by a common processing routine regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Subsequently, in steps S275 and S276, based on the first start condition being satisfied, the first special symbol display device 4A determines a decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol. Regardless of whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, A variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a common random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is determined by a common processing routine using numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer. As described above, the processing of steps S261 to S278 is pattern setting processing for setting a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols in a common processing routine.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 60, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the process of step S292, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). As an example, in the process of step S293, it is determined whether the big hit type buffer value is “00” to “04” or “05”. Here, the big hit type buffer value is set to “05” in step S242 when the big hit type determined in step S241 in FIG. That is, in the process of step S293, it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “surprise”. At this time, since the big hit type is not “surprising”, if the big hit type buffer value is any value from “00” to “04”, setting for transmitting the first hit start designation command is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit type buffer value is “05” corresponding to the big hit type being “surprising”, the setting for transmitting the second hit start designation command is performed. For example, when transmitting a first per-start designation command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the first per-start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the first per-start designation command is stored in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer. On the other hand, when the second per-start designation command is transmitted, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second per-start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the second per-start designation command is stored in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer. Subsequent to the setting in step S293, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294).

  After executing the processing of step S294, it is determined whether or not the big hit type buffer value is “05” (step S295). Here, the big hit type buffer value is set to “05” in step S242 when the big hit type determined in step S241 in FIG. That is, in step S295, it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “surprise”. At this time, since the big hit type is not “surprise” and the big hit type buffer value is a value other than “05” (step S295; No), the gaming state designation buffer is cleared and the 0th bit (bit 0) is set. Both the first bits (bit 1) are initialized to “0” (off) (step S296). On the other hand, if the big hit type buffer value is “05” corresponding to the big hit type being “surprise” (step S295; Yes), the process of step S296 is skipped. Even when the big hit type buffer value is “05”, step S296 may be executed to temporarily clear the gaming state designation buffer. In this case, before clearing the gaming state designation buffer in step S296 corresponding to the big hit type buffer value being “05”, the value of at least the 0th bit (bit 0) in the gaming state designation buffer ( (On / off state) is saved in a predetermined buffer different from the game state designation buffer (for example, the base state buffer at the time of sudden hitting), and the saved buffer value is set when the two round big hit state ends. Based on this, it is only necessary to be able to determine whether the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate low base state or the highly accurate high base state.

  Thereafter, the special figure game counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S297). Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S298), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S299). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S299; Yes), a small hit start time production waiting time is set (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, setting for transmitting the second hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S301). The setting for transmitting the second hit start designation command may be the same setting as the transmission setting in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” in step S293. Subsequent to the setting in step S301, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S302). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S303). If the small hit flag is OFF in step S299 (step S299; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S304). .

  After executing one of the processes of steps S303 and S304, it is determined whether or not the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is “1” (ON) (step S305). Here, the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is set to “1” when the gaming state includes a high base state such as a low probability high base state and a high probability high base state. At this time, if the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is “0” (off) (step S305; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated. On the other hand, when the 0th bit (bit 0) of the game state designation buffer is “1” (ON) (step S305; Yes), whether or not the special game count value is “0”. Is determined (step S306). Here, the special figure game count value, which is the value of the special figure game counter, is determined based on the low probability high base state or high probability after the big hit gaming state corresponding to either “normal” or “fourth probability variation” of the big hit type. While a value other than “0” is set in the high base state, the value is “0” in the other cases because the special game counter is cleared.

  When the special figure game count value is “0” in step S306 (step S306; Yes), the special symbol stop process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure game count value is a value other than “0” (step S306; No), the special figure game count value is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 (step S307). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the updated special figure game count value in step S307 has reached a value (for example, “0”) predetermined as the advantageous release end determination value (step S308). At this time, if the special figure game count value has not reached the advantageous release termination determination value (step S308; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the special figure game count value reaches the advantageous release completion determination value in step S308 (step S308; Yes), the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off). (Step S309). As a result, after the big hit gaming state corresponding to either “normal” or “fourth probability change” is completed, the variable display result does not become “big hit”, and a special number of times (for example, 100 times) is obtained. When the figure game is executed, the high base state ends and a gaming state including a low base state is entered. That is, when the low-accuracy base state is established, the low-accuracy-low base state is established, while when the high-accuracy high-base state is established, the high-accuracy-low base state is established. After executing the process of step S309, the special figure game counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S310), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated. If the advantageous release end determination value used in step S308 is set to “0”, the special figure game count value when reaching the advantageous release end determination value is “0”. The process of S310 may not be executed.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 61, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the post-opening of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the big hit type buffer value read in step S322 is “05” corresponding to the big hit type of “surprise” (step S323). At this time, if the jackpot type buffer value is a value other than “05” (step S323; No), the game state designation buffer value corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value read in step S322 is set (step S322). S324). In the process of step S324, for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is determined according to which value of the big hit type buffer value is “00” to “04”. ) And the first bit (bit 1) are set to “0” (off) or “1” (on).

  Subsequent to the setting in step S324, the big hit type buffer value read in step S322 is “00” corresponding to the “normal” big hit type or “4th probability variation” corresponding to the big hit type “ It is determined whether the value is “04” or any other value (step S325). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is either “00” or “04” (step S325; Yes), the special figure game is counted in order to count the number of executions of the special figure game after the big hit gaming state ends. The initial value of the counter is set (step S326). As an example, in the process of step S326, after the big hit gaming state corresponding to either “normal” or “fourth probability variation” is finished, the high base state such as the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state is obtained. A count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the gaming state including “” may be set in the special figure game counter.

  If it is determined in step S323 that the read value of the jackpot type buffer is “05” (step S323; Yes), the first bit (bit 1) of the gaming state designation buffer is set to “1” (ON). Set (step S327). As a result, when the two round big hit state as the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” ends, for example, the setting to start the advantageous opening control and the short time control such as changing the low base state to the high base state is performed. On the other hand, a setting for starting a gaming state including a high probability state such as a high probability low base state or a high probability high base state is performed. If it is determined in step S295 in FIG. 60 that the big hit type buffer value is “05” in response to the big hit type being “surprise”, the special figure game counter is cleared in step S297. Is done. Therefore, even after the processing of step S306 shown in FIG. 60 is executed after the end of the two round big hit state, the special figure game count value is “0”. The 0 bit (bit 0) is never cleared. As a result, when the game state includes a high base state such as a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state, when the big hit type is controlled to the two round big hit state corresponding to “surprise accuracy” After the round big hit state is finished, it can be set so that the advantageous release control and the short time control in the gaming state including the high base state are continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  When it is determined in step S325 that the read value of the big hit type buffer is neither “00” nor “04” (step S325; No), or after executing any of the processes of steps S326 and S327, The big hit type buffer is cleared and the buffer value is initialized to “00” (step S328). Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S329), the big hit end process is ended.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S57 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). Determine whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value indicating a random number value for determining a normal display result from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, depending on the value of the usual process flag, the following is performed. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure storage unit, the value of the ordinary process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result as the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol game in the general symbol game is set to “per normal symbol” or “ A decision is made as to whether or not it is a “usual figure loss”. At this time, for example, the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being a gaming state including a high base state such as a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. When “2” is “1” (on), the decision table is set so that the ratio of “decision” is higher than that when “0” (off). May be. Thereby, in the game state including the high base state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal game” than in the game state including the low base state. The second start winning opening formed by is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. At this time, for example, when the 0th bit (bit 0) of the game state designation buffer is “1” (on), the normal time is shortened compared to the case where it is “0” (off). The variation pattern may be determined. As a result, in the game state including the high base state, the interval for deriving and displaying the variable display result of the normal symbol in the ordinary game is shortened. The second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, for example, using a common symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, an elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to vary is measured. At this time, a determination is made as to whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time determined in accordance with the normal time fluctuation pattern. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, for driving the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example. The value of the general process flag is updated to “4” after the setting for the enlargement / release control in which the movable blade piece is tilted, such as the setting of the normal operation pattern. At this time, for example, when the 0th bit (bit 0) of the game state designation buffer is “1” (on), the period and the number of times of performing the expansion / release control are smaller than in the case of “0” (off). An increasing normal power operation pattern may be set. As a result, in the game state including the high base state, the period and the number of times that the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state based on the fact that the base map display result is “per base”, the game ball is It becomes easier to enter the second start winning opening. In the case where the general map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process in step S144 is executed when the value of the usual process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2) for the ordinary electric accessory is driven in accordance with the setting of the ordinary electric actuating pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process in step S143. The solenoid drive signal may be generated. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the solenoid 81 is driven and the second start winning opening is set in the expanded open state is measured, and the elapsed time reaches the expanded open time corresponding to the normal operation pattern. A determination is made whether or not. When the elapsed time reaches the expansion opening period, the second start winning opening is changed from the expansion opening state to the normal opening state by stopping the driving of the solenoid 81 and returning the movable blade piece from the tilting position to the vertical position. Set to change to. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 64 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S 401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Here, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is a non-backup RAM that is not backed up by a backup power source, the stored contents of the RAM 122 are stored when power supply to the effect control board 12 is started. It cannot be restored to the content at the previous power supply stop. Therefore, in the process of step S401, after all the storage areas of the RAM 122 are cleared and initialized, various initial values may be set according to the initial setting data stored in advance in the ROM 121, for example.

  Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register setting of the CTC.

  On the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, control that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port to which a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 is input via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 195, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and the production control command provided in the production control buffer setting unit 194 is received. Store in buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  In the command analysis process of step S405, various processes as shown in FIG. 65, for example, are executed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the command analysis process in step S405, first, the effect control command reception buffer is checked to determine whether or not an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When it is determined that there is a reception command, the command is read from the effect control command reception buffer. Subsequently, various processes corresponding to the read reception command are executed.

  For example, when the received command is either the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the recovery flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is cleared and turned off, and the variation start flag Set to on. Also, the variation end flag is cleared and turned off. Thereafter, a predetermined process is executed as the hold memory decrease display process. In the hold memory reduction display process, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, and the like in the start winning memory display unit 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, the display is updated in response to the decrease in the number of stored pending data by one. For example, the start winning memory display unit 5H removes the display at the leftmost display part and moves the display at each display part one by one to the left. At this time, one of the display parts whose display color changes corresponding to the number of stored data (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts that are displayed in blue or red) is not displayed. Return to (transparent state). Note that the hold memory decrease display process is not limited to the process executed when the first change start command or the second change start command is received. For example, the hold memory transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is held. It may be executed when an effect control command for notifying the decrease in the number of memories is received.

  In the command analysis processing, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, data that can identify the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (for example, EXT data of the variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to the effect control buffer. The variation pattern is saved by storing it in a predetermined buffer (for example, a pattern storage buffer) provided in the setting unit 194. When the received command is a variable display result notification command, data that can specify the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command (for example, EXT data of the variable display result notification command) is set in the effect control buffer setting. The variable display result is saved by storing it in a predetermined buffer (for example, a variable display result buffer) provided in the unit 194.

  In the command analysis process, if the received command is a decorative symbol stop command, the variation end flag is set to the on state. If the received command is an initial display designation command, a predetermined initial screen display setting is performed. At this time, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, an initial screen as shown in FIG. 66 (A) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. . If the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, a predetermined power failure recovery screen display setting is performed. At this time, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, a power failure restoration screen as shown in FIG. 66B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Let me. If the received command is a background designation command, a predetermined process is executed as a background designation process.

  In the command analysis process, when the received command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command, the recovery flag is cleared and a predetermined demonstration screen display setting is performed. In this demonstration screen display setting, the demonstration control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, for example, and the demonstration as shown in FIG. Display the screen (demo screen). The demonstration screen display setting may be performed immediately when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, or after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the first variation start command or the second variation start command is set. It may be performed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without reception. For example, if it is determined in step S249 shown in FIG. 57 that the demo-in-progress flag is off, the process of step S250 is immediately executed and the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted. When a predetermined time elapses without receiving the first variation start command or the second variation start command after receiving “”, the demonstration screen display setting may be performed. On the other hand, when the state in which it is determined that the demo flag is off in step S249 shown in FIG. 57 continues for a predetermined time, the process of step S250 is executed and the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted. If so, the demo screen display setting may be performed immediately when the customer waiting demo designation command is received. In addition, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, the final stop symbol that has been stopped (derived) is displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been completed for a predetermined time until the demonstration screen display is started by the demonstration screen display setting. The determined decorative pattern may be continuously displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  In the command analysis process, if the received command is a hit start designation command, it is specified whether the hit start designation command is a 15-time release game start notification or a 2-time release game start notification. Possible data (for example, EXT data of a hit start specifying command) is stored as a start specifying data in a predetermined buffer (for example, a hit start specifying buffer) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 and saved. If the received command is a hit end designation command, data that can specify the notification content of the hit end designation command (for example, EXT data of the hit end designation command) is used as end designation data in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The data is stored and saved in a predetermined buffer (for example, a hit end designation buffer).

  In the command analysis process, when the received command is the first start opening winning designation command, the first winning designation receiving flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state. When the received command is the second start opening winning designation command, the second winning designation receiving flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state. When the received command is a pending storage count notification command, a predetermined process is executed as a pending storage increase display process.

  FIGS. 67 to 69 are flowcharts showing an example of background designating processing executed in response to a case where the received command is a background designating command in the command analysis processing. In the background designating process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the recovery flag is on (step S421 in FIG. 67). At this time, if the recovery flag is on (step S421; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the received background designation command, the display of either one of the probability change state background HKB and the short-time state background HKC is designated. It is determined whether or not display of other backgrounds is designated (step S422). Here, the probability variation state background HKB is designated in accordance with the fact that the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the high probability high base state, and the rendering state is the third rendering mode # 3 or the fourth rendering mode #. 4 and the short time state background HKC is designated when the production state is the third production mode # 3 corresponding to the low probability base state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (See FIG. 5B). And, unless the display of any one of the probability change state background HKB and the short-time state background HKC is specified by the background specification command (when the display of the normal state background HKA or the probability change state background HKD is specified), the pachinko game The effect state in the machine 1 is not the third effect mode # 3 or the fourth effect mode # 4. In other words, the third performance mode # 3 corresponds to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being either the low probability high base state or the high accuracy high base state, and the fourth performance mode # 4 is This corresponds to the fact that the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a highly accurate and high base state.

  If it is determined in step S422 that one of the probability change state background HKB and the short-time state background HKC has been designated (step S422; Yes), the effect mode designation buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 The first bit (bit 1) is set to “1” (ON) (step S423). Here, the recovery flag is set to the ON state when the power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received (see FIG. 65). That is, when it is determined in step S421 that the recovery flag is on, the main board 11 side is based on the fact that the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply is resumed. Restoration is performed so as to be in the state of game control at the time of the previous power supply stop. On the other hand, on the side of the production control board 12, for example, the initialization process in step S401 shown in FIG. 64 is executed, so that the control state of the production operation at the previous power supply stop cannot be recovered. The initial setting has been made. In this state, the first bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) of the effect mode designation buffer are both set to “0” (off) by the initial setting, indicating that the first effect mode # 1. (FIG. 49). At this time, if the game state restored on the main board 11 side is either the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the effect state can be set to the third effect mode # 3. Thus, it is possible to match the restored gaming state and the production state. Therefore, in step S423, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is set to “1” (ON). Accordingly, based on the fact that the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after being controlled during the control in which the production state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the third production mode # 3 or the fourth production mode # 4. The third presentation mode # 3 can be controlled in response to the background designation command.

  If it is determined in step 422 that the display of a background different from the probability change state background HKB or the short-time state background HKC is designated (step S422; No), it is determined whether or not the display of the probability change state background HKD is designated. (Step S424). At this time, if display of the probability change state background HKD is designated (step S424; Yes), the 0th bit (bit 0) of the effect mode designation buffer is set to “1” (on), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the second effect mode # 2 (step S425). Here, the second performance mode # 2 corresponds to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being either the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state (see FIG. 5B). . For this reason, in step S425, the 0th bit (bit 0) of the effect mode designation buffer is set to “1” (corresponding to designation of the display of the probability change state background HKD when the gaming state is high and low base. Set to On. Thereby, when the recovered game state is a high-probability low-base state, it is possible to match the game state after the recovery and the effect state.

  If it is determined in step S424 that the display of the probability variation background HKD is not specified (step S424; No), the processing of step S423 or step S425 is executed assuming that the display of the normal state background HKA is specified. Without processing the background. Here, the first performance mode # 1 corresponds to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being a low probability and low base state (see FIG. 5B). Therefore, in response to the display of the normal state background HKA being designated, both the 0th bit (bit 0) and the 1st bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer are “0” (off) by the initial setting. Even in this case, there is no inconsistency between the restored gaming state and the production state. Thereby, when the recovered game state is a low probability low base state, it is possible to match the recovered game state with the effect state.

  If the restoration flag is OFF in step S421 (step S421; No), is there valid end designation data, for example, by reading the stored contents of the hit end designation buffer provided in the effect control buffer 194? It is determined whether or not (step S426). When the EXT data of the hit end specifying command is stored in the hit end specifying buffer as the end specifying data, it is determined that there is valid end specifying data if the stored content is any one of 01H to 04H. On the other hand, if it is 00H, it may be determined that there is no valid end designation data (see FIG. 5D).

  If it is determined in step S426 that there is valid end designation data (step S426; Yes), the end designation data is read (step S427). Then, based on the end designation data read out in step S427, it is determined whether or not a fourth per-end designation command has been received (step S428). For example, when the EXT data of the hit end designation command is stored as the end designation data, if the end designation data indicates 04H, it may be determined that the fourth hit end designation command is received (FIG. 5 ( D)).

  If it is determined in step S428 that the fourth hit end designation command has not been received (step S428; No), it is determined whether or not the display of the probability variation background HKB is designated by the received background designation command (step S428). S429). At this time, if the display of the probability change state background HKB is not designated (step S429; No), it is determined whether or not the display of the time-short state background HKC is designated (step S430). If the display of the probability variation background HKB is specified in step S429 (step S429; Yes), whether or not a second per-end specifying command is received based on the end specifying data read in step S427. Is determined (step S431).

  When it is determined in step S430 that the display of the short time state background HKC has been designated (step S430; Yes), or when it is determined in step S431 that a second per-end end designation command has been received (step S431; Yes). ), While setting the first bit (bit 1) of the production mode designation buffer to “1” (on), clearing the 0th bit (bit 0) to “0” (off) The state is set to be the third effect mode # 3 (step S432). Note that it is determined that the display of the short-time state background HKC is designated in step S430 in response to the end of the 15 round big hit state corresponding to the “normal” big hit type, This is a case where the game state is controlled to the low-accuracy base state while being transmitted. In addition, in step S431, it is determined that the second hit end designation command has been received because the 15th round big hit state corresponding to the big hit type of “fourth probability variation” has ended. This is a case where the end designation command is transmitted and the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy base state.

  If it is determined in step S431 that the second hit end designation command has not been received (step S431; No), both the 0th bit (bit 0) and the 1st bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer are set. By setting both to “1” (on), the production state is set to the fourth production mode # 4 (step S433). Note that it is determined in step S431 that the second hit end designation command has not been received because the 15-round big hit state corresponding to any one of the big hit types from “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” is terminated. Corresponding to the fact that the first hit end designation command is transmitted and the gaming state is controlled to the high probability high base state, and the two round big hit state corresponding to the “surprise” big hit type has ended. Correspondingly, this is a case where a third per-end designation command is transmitted and the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy base state.

  If it is determined in step S430 that the display of the short time state background HKC is not designated (step S430; No), the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off). In addition, by setting the 0th bit (bit 0) to “1” (on), the production state is set to the second production mode # 2 (step S434). In step S430, it is determined that the display of the short-time state background HKC is not specified. This corresponds to the case where the display of the probability variation state background HKD is designated in response to the control.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S432, S433, and S434, after clearing the end designation data, for example, clearing the hit end designation buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 (step S435), the background designating process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S428 that the fourth hit end designation command has been received (step S428; Yes), processing for setting the effect state after the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display of the probability variation state background HKB is designated by the received background designation command (step S436 in FIG. 68). At this time, if the display of the probability change state background HKB is not designated (step S436; No), it is determined whether or not the display of the time-short state background HKC is designated (step S437).

  If it is determined in step S437 that the display of the short time background HKC is not designated (step S437; No), it is determined whether or not the display of the probability variation state background HKD is designated (step S438). At this time, if the display of the probability change state background HKD is not designated (step S438; No), the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off) and By setting the bit (bit 0) to “1” (on), the effect state is set to the second effect mode # 2 (step S439). Here, it is determined in step S438 that the display of the probability change state background HKD is not specified, in response to the gaming state being in the low probability low base state after the end of the small hit gaming state, the normal state background. This is a case where HKA display is designated. That is, instead of the processing in steps S436 to S438, it may be determined whether or not the display of the normal state background HKA is designated by the received background designation command. In this case, if the display of the normal state background HKA is specified, the process proceeds to step S439. If not specified, the process of step S439 may be skipped. Note that when the production state is set to be the second production mode # 2 in step S439, the production state before the setting is the first production mode # 1, for example, production control counter A predetermined initial value (for example, “0”) may be set in a variable display counter provided in the setting unit 193. Alternatively, when the effect state is set to be the second effect mode # 2 in step S439, a predetermined initial value may be set in the variable display counter regardless of the effect state before the setting.

  If it is determined in step S436 that the display of the probability change state background HKB is designated (step S436; Yes), or if it is determined in step S437 that the display of the short time state background HKC is designated (step S437; Yes), step When it is determined in S438 that the display of the probability change state background HKD is designated (step S438; Yes), or after the processing of step S439 is executed, for example, the hit end provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is ended. After clearing the end designation data such as clearing the designated buffer (step S440), the background designation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S426 in FIG. 67 that there is no valid end designation data (step S426; No), it is determined whether display of the normal state background HKA is designated by the received background designation command. (Step S441 in FIG. 69). At this time, if display of the normal state background HKA is designated (step S441; Yes), for example, an effect mode designation buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like is read (step S442). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the first bit (bit 1) in the read result of the effect mode designation buffer in step S442 is “1” (on) (step S443).

  When the first bit (bit 1) of the read result is “1” (ON) in step S443 (step S443; Yes), for example, from the random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, etc. Numeric data indicating the random number SR10 for mode determination is extracted (step S444). Here, it is determined in step S443 that the first bit (bit 1) of the read result is “1” (ON) because the gaming state is changed from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state. Subsequently, the display of the normal state background HKA corresponding to the low probability low base state is designated. That is, when the gaming state is the low probability high base state, the rendering state is the third rendering mode # 3 (see FIG. 5B). When the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times without the variable display result being “big hit” after the big hit gaming state corresponding to “normal” is set as the big hit type, the low probability high base state is ended. It is controlled to the low probability low base state. Thereafter, when the background designation command is transmitted, it becomes a background designation command corresponding to the gaming state being the low probability low base state. Therefore, in step S441, it is determined that the display of the normal state background HKA is designated. (See FIG. 5B). At this time, since the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is a value corresponding to the third effect mode # 3, it is determined to be “1” (ON) in step S443. (See FIG. 49).

  Following the processing of step S444, by referring to the effect mode determination table 210 shown in FIG. 43A based on the extracted random value SR10, it is determined whether or not the random value SR10 matches the effect change determination value data. Determination is made (step S445). At this time, if the random value SR10 matches the effect change determination value data (step S445; Yes), for example, a predetermined initial value (for example, “0”) is set in a variable display counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Setting is made (step S446). Then, by clearing the first bit (bit 1) of the rendering mode designation buffer to “0” (off) and setting the 0th bit (bit 0) to “1” (on), the rendering state Is set to be the second effect mode # 2 (step S447), and the background designating process is terminated.

  If the first bit (bit 1) of the read result is not “1” (ON) in step S443 (step S443; No), the 0th bit (bit 0) of the read result is “1” (ON). ) Is determined (step S448). Here, when the effect state is the second effect mode # 2, while it is determined in step S448 that the 0th bit (bit 0) of the read result is “1” (on). When the effect state is the first effect mode # 1, the 0th bit (bit 0) of the read result is not “1” (on) but “0” (off) in step S448. (See FIG. 49).

  Then, in response to the effect state being the second effect mode # 2, when it is determined in step S448 that the 0th bit (bit 0) of the read result is “1” (ON). (Step S448; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display count value has reached a predetermined effect end lottery execution value (eg, “21”) (step S449). Here, the variable display count value corresponds to the effect state being the second effect mode # 2 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or when the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended. It may be updated by adding 1 or the like. For example, when it is determined that the variable display result is not “big hit” in the decoration symbol variation end process in step S163 shown in FIG. 72 to be described later, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is “ It is determined whether it is 0 ”(off) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is“ 1 ”(on), that is, whether the effect state is the second effect mode # 2. And if it is 2nd production mode # 2, what is necessary is just to update by adding 1 a variable display count value. On the other hand, if the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in the decorative symbol variation end process, the variable display counter may be cleared and the count value may be initialized to “0”.

  When the variable display count value reaches the effect end lottery execution value in step S449 (step S449; Yes), a lottery process for determining whether to end the second effect mode # 2 is executed. That is, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR11 for determining the end of the effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S450). Then, by referring to the effect end determination table 211 shown in FIG. 43B, it is determined whether or not the random value SR11 extracted in step S450 matches the effect end determination value data (step S451). At this time, if the random value SR11 matches the effect end determination value data (step S451; Yes), the variable display counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S452).

  If the 0th bit of the read result is not “1” (ON) in step S448 (step S448; No), or if the variable display count value has not reached the effect end lottery execution value in step S449 (step S449). No), or if the random number SR11 does not match the effect end determination value data in step S451 (step S451; No), the background designation process ends. For example, when the effect state is the second effect mode # 2, if the variable display count value has not reached the effect end lottery execution value, the processing of steps S450 and S451, that is, the second effect mode # 2 is performed. The lottery process for determining whether or not to end is not executed. On the other hand, after the variable display count value reaches the effect end lottery execution value, is the process of steps S450 and S451 executed every time a background designation command is received to end the second effect mode # 2? A determination of whether or not will be made. Note that the process of step S452 may be executed before the process of step S451. In this case, if the gaming state is a low probability low base state and the production state is the second production mode # 2, a predetermined number of special game games and decorative symbols corresponding to the production end lottery execution value are displayed. Each time it is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the second effect mode # 2. Further, the processes in steps S450 and S451 may be performed when the variation start flag is on, but may not be performed when the variation start flag is off. That is, in this embodiment, the case where the background designation command is transmitted in response to the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command according to the setting in steps S250 and S251 shown in FIG. 57, and the step S280 shown in FIG. Depending on the setting in, the background designation command may be transmitted in response to the transmission of the first variation start command or the second variation start command. Therefore, when the variation start flag is turned on in response to the start of the variable display of the special game or decorative design (see FIG. 65), it is determined whether or not to end the second effect mode # 2. On the other hand, the second effect mode # 2 may not be ended when the special display game or the variable display of the decorative symbols is not started.

  In step S445, when the random value SR10 matches the effect end determination value data and does not match the effect change determination value data (step S445; No), after the process of step S452 is executed, the effect mode buffer After setting the rendering state to be the first rendering mode # 1 by clearing both the first bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) to “0” (off) ( Step S453), the background designating process is terminated. If the display of the normal state background HKA is not designated in step S441 (step S441; No), it is determined whether or not the display of the probability change state background HKD is designated (step S454). At this time, if the probability variation state background HKD is not designated (step S454; No), the background designation processing is terminated. Here, in step S454, it is determined that the display of the probability variation state background HKD is not designated except immediately after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and the gaming state is in the high probability high base state. This is a case where the display of the probability variation state background HKB is designated in response to a certain situation, or the display of the short-time state background HKC is designated in response to the gaming state being a low probability high base state. If the probability variation state background HKD is not designated in step S454, the effect state is set according to which of the probability variation state background HKB and the short time state background HKC is designated. Also good. For example, when the probability change state background HKB is designated, it is determined whether or not the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is “1” (on), and if it is “1” (on). For example, while the background designating process ends, if it is “0” (off), the first bit (bit 1) is set to “1” (on). When the short-time state background HKC is designated, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is set to “1” (on) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is cleared to “0”. When “(off)” is set, the effect state is set to the third effect mode # 3, and then the background designating process ends. As a result, even if the process necessary for setting the production state is not properly executed, such as when either the hit end designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is not received, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to prevent inconsistency between the gaming state and the production state.

  If display of the probability change state background HKD is designated in step S454 (step S454; Yes), the effect mode designation buffer value is read (step S455), and the first bit (bit 1) in the read result is “1”. It is determined whether or not “ON” (step S456). At this time, if the first bit (bit 1) of the read result is not “1” (ON) (step S456; No), the background designating process is terminated. Here, in step S456, it is determined that the first bit (bit 1) of the read result is not “1” (on) except immediately after the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. This is a case where the production state is the second production mode # 2 corresponding to the state being the high probability low base state (see FIGS. 5B and 49).

  If the first bit of the read result is “1” (ON) in step S456 (step S456; Yes), the process proceeds to step S447, and the effect state is set to be the second effect mode # 2. Do. Here, in step S456, it is determined that the first bit (bit 1) of the read result is “1” (ON) because the gaming state is changed from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Subsequently, the display of the probability change state background HKD corresponding to the high and low base state is designated. That is, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy and high-base state, the effect state is the third effect mode # 3 or the fourth effect mode # 4 (see FIG. 5B). Among these, after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “fourth probability change”, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability high base state and the production state becomes the third production mode # 3. Thereafter, when the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times without the variable display result being “big hit”, the high-accuracy high-base state is ended and the high-accuracy low-base state is controlled. When the background designation command is transmitted subsequently, it becomes a background designation command corresponding to the gaming state being the high probability low base state, so it is determined in step S454 that the display of the probability variation state background HKD is designated. It will be. At this time, since the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is a value corresponding to the third effect mode # 3, it is determined to be “1” (ON) in step S456. (See FIG. 49).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pending storage increase display process executed in response to a received command being a pending storage count notification command in the command analysis process. In this hold memory increase display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the recovery flag is on (step S471). At this time, if the recovery flag is off (step S471; No), it is determined whether or not the first winning designation flag is on (step S472). The first winning designation flag is set to the on state when the first start opening winning designation command is received (see FIG. 65).

  If the first winning designation flag is on in step S472 (step S472; Yes), the first winning designation flag is cleared and turned off (step S473), and the first reserved memory number is increased. Correspondingly, the first hold display increase update setting for updating the hold storage display in the start winning storage display section 5H is performed (step S474). In this first hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed on the start winning storage display unit 5H is used for the first start due to the game ball entering the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  If the first winning designation flag is off in step S472 (step S472; No), it is determined whether or not the second winning designation flag is on (step S475). The second winning designation flag is set to the on state when the second start opening winning designation command is received (see FIG. 65). If the second winning designation flag is on (step S475; Yes), the second winning designation flag is cleared and turned off (step S476), and started in response to an increase in the second reserved memory number. A second on-hold display increase update setting for updating the on-hold storage display in the winning memory display section 5H is performed (step S477). In this second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed on the start winning memory display unit 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  When the recovery flag is on in step S471 (step S471; Yes), or when the second winning designation flag is off in step S475 (step S475; No), when there is no start opening prize designation Correspondingly, a display update setting is made when no start opening winning designation is made to update the hold storage display in the start winning storage display section 5H (step S478). In the display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, the number of display parts corresponding to the total number of reserved storages which is the total number of stored data notified by the reserved storage number notification command in the start prize storage display unit 5H is displayed. , Display settings are made to display all in gray. After performing such a display update setting when no start opening prize designation is made, the on-hold storage increase display process is terminated. Here, it is determined in step S471 that the recovery flag is on when the pending storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received by the setting in step S38 shown in FIG. That is, when the power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received according to the setting in step S32 shown in FIG. 51, the recovery flag is set to the on state (see FIG. 65). When the pending storage number notification command transmitted in response to this power failure recovery designation command is received, it is determined in step S471 that the recovery flag is on.

  As described above, when the first hold display increase update setting is performed in step S474 and the second hold display increase update setting is performed in step S477, when the pending storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. If either of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command that is the starting opening winning designation command is normally received, for example, as shown in FIG. On the display unit 5H, a first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition and a second special figure reservation based on the establishment of the second start condition The second reserved memory number, which is the number of stored pending data in the storage unit 151B, can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, in step S478, when the start opening prize designation is not specified, the display update setting is performed, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the recovery flag is turned on, or the starting opening prize is received. Based on the determination that neither the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command that is the designation command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start winning storage display section 5H is as follows: By changing to a predetermined display mode and displaying it in gray, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number cannot be specified. Can be displayed. After that, when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, one of the processes of steps S474 and S477 is executed. A new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command can be added while maintaining the display mode in the gray display area. As an example, when the hold memory display as shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed, if the hold memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, By performing the first hold display increase update setting in S474, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), a blue display corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is added.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the image display device 5 is changed depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area, and color symbol display portions 5A of “left” and “right” 5B includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of the color symbol in any one of 5B. For example, in response to the change start flag being on, a determination is made to start variable display of decorative symbols and color symbols. At this time, if it is determined that variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to, in order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative design and color design, final decorative design that becomes the final stop design according to the variation pattern and variable display results, temporary stop design, specific production The process includes determining a pattern, a sub-notice pattern, and the like, and setting an effect control pattern such as a symbol variation control pattern and a sub-notice effect control pattern based on the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, in accordance with the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value), effects such as the symbol variation control pattern and the sub-notice effect control pattern Processing for reading various control data from the control pattern and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. As an example, when any of the sub-notice CYP3-1-1, sub-notice CYP3-2-1, and sub-notice CYP3-3-1 is set as the notice effect control pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161. The operation control signal is checked within the predetermined period during which the sub-prediction effect can be executed by checking the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 via the predetermined input port included in the I / O 125 by the effect control CPU 120. It is determined whether or not is turned on. At this time, if the operation detection signal is turned on, for example, the sub-notice CYP3-1-1 is switched to the sub-notice CYP3-1-2, the sub-notice CYP3-2-1 is switched to the sub-notice CYP3-2-2, By changing the sub-notice CYP3-3-1 to the sub-notice CYP3-3-2, the effect operation in the sub-notice effect is changed. Note that the notice effect control patterns of the sub notice CYP3-1-1, sub notice CYP3-2-1, and sub notice CYP3-3-1 used before the operation detection signal is turned on are displayed on the image display device 5. Some effect image (for example, an image prompting the operation of the operation button 30) may be displayed in the area, or the effect image may not be displayed. Here, when the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-1-1, sub notice CYP3-2-1, and sub notice CYP3-3-1 displays an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, A common effect image may be displayed in the notice effect control pattern, or different effect images may be displayed. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying sound in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and playing the game effect lamp 9 and decorations by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. As an example, in the effect processing during small hit control in step S165, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-2 and the hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. Reading from the pattern table 182 and setting the production control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such a setting may be an effect operation common to both the accuracy and the small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “Accuracy”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off by output of electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as blinking / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  73 and 74 are flowcharts showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (FIG. 73). Step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach” It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 7), “ It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development opportunity”.

  When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined decorative symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 27D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a definitive decorative symbol.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the pattern is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 27A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 27B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 27C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Thus, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if it is other than a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B, the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 30A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 30B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display portion 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols that are the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are determined. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” ornament symbol display portion 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is It is determined whether it is one of the “surprise” or other (step S507 in FIG. 74). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, the change pattern designation command By reading the EXT data or the like, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach”. Therefore, when it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4 (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S503 shown in FIG. 73, and step S504 is performed. The final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined by one of the processes of S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, it is designated by the variation pattern designation command in the process of step S503 shown in FIG. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the special PG1-4 (see FIG. 8), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”.

  If it is determined in step S508 of FIG. 74 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 (step S508; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG2-1 to special PG2-. It is determined whether it is any of the three fluctuation patterns or any other pattern (step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 8, each of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 designates that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state. ing. Therefore, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506 shown in FIG. The final decorative symbol that constitutes the final stop symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 in FIG. 74 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-. One of the three variation patterns. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 are a combination of the fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result of the decorative graphic, and any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any one of the special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns, the combination of the finalized decorative symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 31C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S507; No), among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “ It is determined whether one of “first probability variation” and “second probability variation” or any other one is selected (step S511). At this time, when the jackpot type is other than “first probability variation” and “second probability variation” (step S511; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination is determined ( Step S512). That is, when the jackpot type is any one of “normal”, “third probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation”, the determined decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are determined. As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 31A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  If the jackpot type is either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is selected. Determination is made (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 31B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 73, or after performing any of the processes of steps S510, S512, and S513 in FIG. 74, the specific effect setting process is performed (FIG. 73, step S514). FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, “main notice”, or It is determined whether it is a specific effect other than those (step S552). At this time, if it is one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “main notice”, the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step S553). ). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 32A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and shown in FIG. 32B in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set, and if the specific effect of “main notice” is set, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 32C is set.

  Following the process of step S553, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S554). For example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. To do. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is selected from the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S552. To decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, numerical data indicating the second specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-2 is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-2, the specific effect patterns are stored in the pseudo sequences TP2-1 to TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S552. Decide on one. In the case of a specific effect of “main notice”, for example, numerical data indicating a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. At this time, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the main notice TP3-1 to the main notice TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  After performing the determination in step S554, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “main notice” (step S555). If the specific effect is “main notice” (step S555; Yes), The previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1 to the main notice TP3-3 determined in step S554 (step S556). For example, when the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-2 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “2”. When the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-3 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “3”.

  By executing the processing of step S556 in this way, the main notice TP3-1 to the main notice TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “main notice” is specified. Each time the effect pattern is determined, the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the determined specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1 to main notice TP3-3 can be updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined effect operation type can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. And in the process of step S554, when it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 32C is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, or “main notice” (step S552; No), the specific effect is other than “main notice” in step S555. (Step S555; No), or after executing the process of step S556, the specific effect is any one of "slip", "pseudo-ream", "expansion chance", or It is determined whether it is a specific effect other than those (step S557). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; No), the specific effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is any one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; Yes), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined. (Step S558), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S558, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, a temporary stop symbol determination table according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 34E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is set, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change is set to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 35A is selected and set as the use table, while the variation pattern is super PA3-4, super In the case of any one of PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated.

  As another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 37 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3, which become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8, are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above in step S514 shown in FIG. 73, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S571). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S571; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S571 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probability” (step S571; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S572). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S573). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S573, referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A set in step S572, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first certain change”. The presence / absence of the promotion effect during change is determined according to which of the “fourth probability change” (step S574). At this time, when it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S575; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S575; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S576, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 38 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process as described above in step S515 shown in FIG. 73, the sub notice setting process is executed (step S516). FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sub-notice setting process executed in step S516. In this sub-notice setting process, first, the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 39 is selected and set as a use table (step S591). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S592). Then, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S592, there is no notice or sub notice patterns of the notice CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. One of the types is determined (step S593). At this time, if it is determined that there is no notice (step S594; Yes), the sub notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S593 that any of the sub-notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 (step S594; No), the sub-notice pattern determination shown in FIG. 40 is determined according to the determined sub-notice pattern type. One of the table 171A, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 41, and the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 42 is selected and set as a use table (step S595). That is, if the sub-notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined in step S593, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171A is set. If the sub-notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is determined, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171B is set. Is set, and when the sub-notice pattern type of the notice CY3 is determined, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C is set. Thereafter, the sub notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S596), and the sub notice setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S596, for example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY1, a random value for determining the first sub-notice pattern is obtained from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating SR8-1 is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S595 based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random value SR8-1, there is no sub notice or sub notice YP1-1 to sub notice YP1-. One of the four sub-notice patterns is determined.

  As another example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice CY2, the random value SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern is determined from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub-notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S595 based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random value SR8-2, no sub-notice or sub-notice YP2-1 to sub-notice YP2- One of the four sub-notice patterns is determined.

  As another example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice CY3, for example, a random counter SR8- for determining the third sub-notice pattern is determined from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 Numerical data indicating 3 is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S595 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-3, no sub notice or sub notice YP3-1 to sub notice YP3- One of the three sub-notice patterns is determined.

  After executing the above notice effect setting processing in step S516 shown in FIG. 73, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S517). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the effect mode designation buffer value and the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any effect mode among the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4. Identify whether or not Then, corresponding to the effect mode specified at this time, any one of the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D shown in FIG. 44 is selected as the use table. After that, it corresponds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined in step S554 shown in FIG. 75, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during change determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Then, one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 45 is selected and set as a use pattern. The symbol variation control pattern table 180 in which the symbol variation control pattern is selected at this time is included in the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D that are selected as the use table. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the sub notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 46 corresponding to the sub notice pattern determined in step S596 shown in FIG. 77 is used. Select and set as a pattern. At this time, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 for selecting the notice effect control pattern is included in the effect control pattern tables 230A to 230D selected as the use table.

  Following the processing in step S517, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S517. Is set (step S518). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left” and “middle” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are provided. , The variation of the decorative design is started in each of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variation of the color symbol in any of the “left” and “right” color symbol display portions 5A and 5B. Is set to start the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 (step S519). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S520), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  In the decorative symbol variation setting process, for example, before the process of step S519 is performed, a process of determining a definite color symbol may be performed. At this time, depending on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command is transmitted from the main board 11, the determined color in one of the “left” and “right” color symbol display portions 5A and 5B. Determine the design. For example, in the case of determining the determined color symbol in the “left” color symbol display unit 5A in accordance with the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “ In the case of determining one of the “blue” color symbols and determining the determined color symbol in the “right” color symbol display unit 5B, it may be determined as either “red” or “blue”.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit control effect processing executed in step S164 of FIG. In the effect processing during the big hit control, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S601). At this time, if a hit end designation command is received (step S601; Yes), a setting for ending the big hit effect that is performed corresponding to the big hit gaming state is made (step S602), and the value of the production process flag is set. After updating to “6” corresponding to the ending effect process (step S603), the big hit control effect process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S602, a predetermined display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, a predetermined sound effect signal is transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a predetermined electrical decoration signal is transmitted. It is only necessary to perform control to end the effect operation that is the effect during the big hit by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 or the like.

  If no hit end designation command is received in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not a promotion effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S604). . Here, the promotion effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process of step S612 described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing a process of step S616. Even when the process of step S602 is executed, the promotion effect flag may be cleared and turned off.

  If the flag during promotion effect is OFF in step S604 (step S604; No), for example, depending on whether or not the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined effect start determination value, etc. It is determined whether or not the execution timing has come (step S605). Here, in the big hit state of 2 rounds, since the execution period of each round is short, the effect control process timer value may be set so as not to reach the effect start determination value.

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; Yes), the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B is selected as the use table. Set (step S606). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the promotion effect execution random number SR5 is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S607). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S607, by referring to the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “fourth probability change”. Depending on whether it is, it is decided whether or not there is a jackpot promotion promotion, and if there is a jackpot promotion promotion decision whether to make a jackpot promotion promotion success or a jackpot promotion promotion failure, etc. A determination regarding the execution of the effect is made (step S608).

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; No), or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in step S608 (step S609; Yes). ), A setting is made to execute an effect operation that is an effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds that is the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state (step S610). As an example, in the processing of step S610, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 rounds big hit or sudden / small hit transmitted from the main board 11. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 47, and the effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, By transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14, an effect operation that is an effect during a big hit is executed. After executing the processing of step S610, the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  In the processing of step S610, when setting corresponding to the fact that the designation command for opening the big prize opening for accuracy / small hit is transmitted from the main board 11, it is executed immediately before the big hit gaming state is entered. Depending on the variation pattern type into which the variation pattern in the variable display of decorative symbols is classified, settings for executing different rendering operations may be performed. As an example, a variation pattern type common to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1. When the decorative symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern classified into “2” and the control is controlled to the big hit state for two rounds, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-2 and hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. The effect control patterns to be sequentially used are selected and read out, and the effect operation is set according to the effect control patterns. On the other hand, the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. 47 is selected as an effect control pattern that sequentially uses the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 shown in FIG. 47. Then, the rendering operation is set in accordance with the rendering control pattern.

  If it is determined in step S608 to execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S609; No), settings for starting the jackpot promotion effect are performed (step S611). As an example, in the process of step S611, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 round big hits transmitted from the main board 11. Then, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. At this time, for example, the value of the notification content buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 (notification content buffer value) is set in accordance with which of the big success promotion effect and the big success promotion effect is executed. It may be. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, while the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect. Set to. Then, after setting the promotion effect in-progress flag to the on state (step S612), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S604 that the promoted effect flag is on (step S604; Yes), for example, does the effect control process timer value match the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern? Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the end timing of promotion effect during jackpot is reached (step S613). At this time, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; No), settings are made to control the rendering operation that becomes the jackpot promotion effect (step S614). As an example, in the process of step S614, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the production operation that becomes the promotion effect during the big hit, for example, by transmitting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S614, the big hit control effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S613 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; Yes), settings are made to end the jackpot promotion effect (step S615), and the flag for the promotion effect is cleared. Then, after the off state is set (step S616), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect process executed in step S166 of FIG. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S631). Here, the ending effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S638 described later, and is cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S641.

  When the ending effect flag is OFF in step S631 (step S631; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the big hit type is “normal”. It is determined whether it is any of the “fourth probability variation”, or other big hit types or small hit types (step S632). At this time, if it is a big hit type or a small hit type other than “normal” or “fourth probability variation” (step S632; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S633). . If the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S633; Yes), for example, whether the promotion success effect has been executed from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S634). As an example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. What is necessary is just to determine that it is not.

  When it is determined in step S633 that the jackpot type is other than “third probability variation” (step S633; No), or when it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has been executed (step S634). ; Yes), a setting for starting a production operation to be a predetermined non-promotion ending production is performed (step S635). As an example, in the process of step S635, the game is opened 15 times and released twice by reading the start designation data (see FIG. 65) stored in the hit start designation buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. It is determined which of the games has been executed (see FIG. 5C). Then, in accordance with the determination result of the executed open game, the effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 47, and the effect control process timer is set. As another example, in the process of step S635, notification by the hit end designation command is performed by reading the end designation data (see FIG. 65) stored in the hit end designation buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The contents are specified (see FIG. 5D). Then, in accordance with the specified notification content, the effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 47, and the effect control process timer is set.

  If it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has not been executed (step S634; No), a setting is made to start the effect operation that becomes the ending promotion success effect (step S636). As an example, in the process of step S636, various effect control pattern tables 182 for effect control patterns for executing the promotion success effect in response to the end of the 15 round jackpot state corresponding to the “third probability change” jackpot type. To set the production control process timer.

  If it is determined in step S632 that the jackpot type is either “normal” or “fourth probability variation” (step S632; Yes), the setting for starting the production operation that becomes the ending promotion failure production is performed. This is performed (step S637). As an example, in the process of step S637, various effects control patterns for executing the promotion failure effect in response to the end of the 15 round jackpot state corresponding to the “normal” or “fourth probability variation” jackpot type. Reading from the control pattern table 182 and setting the production control process timer.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S635 to S637, the ending effect flag is set to the on state (step S638), and the ending effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S631 that the ending effect flag is on (step S631; Yes), for example, the effect control process timer value matches the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect depending on whether or not (step S639). Here, the ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, including an unpromoted ending effect, an ending promotion success effect, and an ending promotion failure effect.

  If it is determined in step S639 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; No), settings are made to control the effect operation that will be the ending effect (step S640). As an example, in the process of step S640, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123 according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the rendering operation as an ending effect by transmitting the illumination signal or transmitting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S640, the ending effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S639 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; Yes), for example, the ending effect flag is cleared and turned off, and the display control unit 123 Ending effects such as supplying a predetermined display control command, transmitting a predetermined sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and transmitting a predetermined electrical signal to the lamp control board 14. Is set to end the process (step S641). At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S642), and then the ending effect process ends.

  Next, an example of a specific operation in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing transitions relating to the gaming state and effect state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the end of the big hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 80, after the end of the big hit gaming state, corresponding to the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 or the background designated by the background designation command, It will be controlled in various gaming states and production states. When the big hit gaming state ends, for example, when the number of round executions reaches the maximum number of times of winning the winning a prize opening in the processing after opening the big winning opening in step S116 shown in FIG. Settings are made to transmit any of the hit end designation commands. Thereafter, the command control process of step S58 shown in FIG. 52 is executed, so that a hit end designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If neither the first start condition nor the second start condition is satisfied after the big hit gaming state is ended, the total reserved memory count value is “0” in step S231 shown in FIG. In step S251, the setting for transmitting the background designation command is performed. Thereafter, the background control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S58 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if at least one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied after the big hit gaming state is finished, the special process flag is set to “ After being updated to 1 ″, setting for transmitting the background designation command is performed in step S280 shown in FIG. Thereafter, the background control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S58 shown in FIG.

  If the display of the probability variation state background HKB is designated by the background designation command transmitted following the end of the big hit gaming state, the determination of the presence of the end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67, and in step S429 Corresponding to the determination of the background HKB designation (the fourth hit end designation command is transmitted at the end of the small hit gaming state (see FIG. 5D), not transmitted at the end of the big hit gaming state), the second per end designation It is determined whether or not a command has been received (step S431). At this time, if the second winning end command is transmitted corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state (step S431; Yes), the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode specifying buffer is set to “1” in step S432. Setting “(ON)” and clearing the 0th bit (bit 0) to “0” (OFF) sets the rendering state to the third rendering mode # 3. Here, when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “fourth probability change” is completed, the second winning end designation command is transmitted in the big winning opening opening post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. Settings are made. Thereafter, in response to the gaming state being controlled to the high probability high base state, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation state background HKB is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. Is done. Thus, when the game state becomes the high probability high base state after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “fourth probability variation”, the rendering state becomes the third rendering mode # 3 (shown in FIG. 80). State transition corresponding to “background HKB designation” and “second hit completion designation” from “big hit gaming state end”).

  When the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “4th probable change” ends, based on the fact that the big hit type buffer value is “04”, the initial value setting of the special figure game counter is set in step S326 shown in FIG. Is done. Thereafter, each time the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 60 is executed, the special figure game count value is updated, and it is determined in step S308 that the updated special figure game count value has reached the advantageous release end determination value. In this case, the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off) in step S309, and the advantageous release control and the time reduction control in the high-accuracy and high-base state are terminated. Is set, and the gaming state becomes a highly accurate and low base state. Subsequently, a background designation command for designating display of the probability variation state background HKD is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. At this time, the determination of no end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67, the background HKD designation in step S454 shown in FIG. 69, and the first bit (bit 1) of the read result in step S456 are “1”. Corresponding to the determination of “(ON)”, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is cleared to “0” (OFF) and the 0th bit (bit 0) in step S447. Is set to “1” (on) to set the rendering state to the second rendering mode # 2. Thus, when the gaming state changes from the highly accurate high base state to the highly accurate low base state, the effect state changes from the third effect mode # 3 to the second effect mode # 2 (the “effect mode shown in FIG. 80). State transition corresponding to “background HKD designation” from “# 3” and “highly accurate base state”).

  Thereafter, the game state designation buffer may be cleared until the processing of step S296 shown in FIG. 60 is executed because the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is other than “surprise”. Absent. If the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is “surprise”, the first bit (bit 1) of the gaming state designation buffer is “1” (step S327 shown in FIG. 61). ON) is only set, and the gaming state is not changed if the base state is high and low. Therefore, after the gaming state becomes the high probability low base state, until the game is in the big hit state for 15 rounds corresponding to the big hit type other than “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the game The state is maintained on a high and low basis. At this time, based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. 59, a background designation command for designating display of the probability variation state background HKD is transmitted. Then, since it is determined in step S441 shown in FIG. 69 that the background HKA is not designated, the processes in steps S448 to S453 are not executed. Thus, after the gaming state changes from the third rendering mode # 3 to the second rendering mode # 2 in response to the gaming state changing from the highly accurate high base state to the highly accurate low base state, the variable display result is The second presentation mode # 2 is continued until the big hit type when “big hit” is other than “surprise”.

  If it is determined in step S431 that the second hit end designation command is not transmitted in response to the end of the big hit gaming state (step S431; No), in step S433, the effect mode designation buffer No. Setting both the 1st bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) to “1” (on) sets the rendering state to the fourth rendering mode # 4. Here, when the big hit gaming state corresponding to one of the big hit types from “first positive change” to “third positive change” ends, the post-opening process for the big winning opening in step S116 shown in FIG. Is set for transmitting the first per-end designation command. Further, when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” ends, a setting for transmitting the third hit end designation command is performed in the post-opening process of the big winning opening in step S116 shown in FIG. Is called. Thereafter, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability high base state, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation state background HKB is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. . In this way, when the gaming state becomes the high probability and high base state after the big hit gaming state corresponding to any of the big hit type is “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” or “surprise probability”, The effect state is the fourth effect mode # 4 (the state transition corresponding to “background HKB designation” and “first / third hit end designation” from “big hit gaming state end” shown in FIG. 80). Thereafter, the game state buffer is not cleared until the processing of step S296 shown in FIG. 60 is executed because the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is other than “surprise”. The gaming state is maintained in a highly accurate and high base state. At this time, based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. 59, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation state background HKB is transmitted. Then, since it is determined in step S441 shown in FIG. 69 that the background HKA is not designated, the fourth hit is continued until the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is other than “surprise”. Production mode # 4.

  When the display of the short time state background HKC is designated by the background designation command transmitted after the end of the big hit gaming state, the determination of the presence of the end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67 and the background HKC in step S430 are performed. In response to the designation determination, in step S432, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is set to “1” (on) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is cleared to “0” ( By setting “off”, the setting is made such that the effect state is the third effect mode # 3. Here, when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “normal” ends, the setting for transmitting the second hit end designation command in the post-hit opening process of step S116 shown in FIG. 54 is set. Done. Thereafter, in response to the gaming state being controlled to the low probability high base state, a background designation command for designating display of the short time state background HKC is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. Is done. Thus, when the game state becomes the low probability base state after the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit type “normal”, the production state becomes the third production mode # 3 (“big hit shown in FIG. 80”). State transition corresponding to “Background HKC designation” from “Game state end”).

  When the big hit gaming state corresponding to the “big hit” type is “normal”, based on the fact that the big hit type buffer value is “00”, the initial value of the special figure game counter is set in step S326 shown in FIG. Is called. Thereafter, each time the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 60 is executed, the special figure game count value is updated, and it is determined in step S308 that the updated special figure game count value has reached the advantageous release end determination value. In this case, the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off) in step S309, thereby completing the advantageous release control and the time reduction control in the low-accuracy base state. The game state is set to the low probability and low base state. Subsequently, a background designation command for designating display of the normal state background HKA is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. At this time, the determination of no end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67, the background HKA designation in step S441 shown in FIG. 69, and the first bit (bit 1) of the read result in step S443 are “1”. Corresponding to the determination that “(ON)” is set, a determination is made as to whether the effect state is the first effect mode # 1 or the second effect mode # 2 (steps S444 and S445). At this time, since the random value SR10 matches the effect end determination value data in step S445 and does not match the effect change determination value data (step S445; No), the first bit of the effect mode designation buffer in step S453 By setting both (bit 1) and 0th bit (bit 0) to "0" (off), the effect state is set to the first effect mode # 1. Thus, when the gaming state changes from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, the rendering state may be changed from the third rendering mode # 3 to the first rendering mode # 1 (shown in FIG. 80). State transition corresponding to “background HKA designation” and “random number SR10 = production end determination value data” from “effect mode # 3” and “low-accuracy base state”).

  On the other hand, if the random value SR10 matches the effect change determination value data in step S445 shown in FIG. 69 (step S445; Yes), the variable display counter is initialized in step S446, and then the process proceeds to step S447. By clearing the first bit (bit 1) of the rendering mode designation buffer to “0” (off) and setting the 0th bit (bit 0) to “1” (on), a highly accurate base In the same manner as when the state ends and the high probability low base state is reached, the rendering state changes from the third rendering mode # 3 to the second rendering mode # 2. Thus, when the gaming state changes from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, the production state can be changed from the third production mode # 3 to the second production mode # 2 (shown in FIG. 80). State transition corresponding to “background HKA designation” and “random number SR10 = effect change determination value data” from “effect mode # 3” and “low-accuracy base state”).

  After the gaming state changes from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, a background designation command for designating display of the normal state background HKA is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. Is done. If it does so, in step S441 shown in FIG. 69, it will determine with it being background HKA designation | designated (step S441; Yes). Then, in response to the effect state being the second effect mode # 2, it is determined in step S443 that the first bit (bit 1) of the read result is “0” (off) (step S443; No) If it is determined in step S448 that the 0th bit (bit 0) of the read result is “1” (ON) (step S448; Yes), the variable display count value is rendered in step S449. In response to reaching the end lottery execution value (step S449; Yes), a lottery process for determining whether to end the second effect mode # 2 is executed in steps S450 and S451. That is, when the game state changes from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state and the production state is the second production mode # 2, the variable display count value is the production end lottery execution value. Is reached, every time a background designation command is transmitted, it is determined whether or not to end the second rendering mode # 2.

  If it is determined in step S451 that the random number SR11 matches the effect end determination value data and the second effect mode # 2 ends (step S451; Yes), an effect mode designation buffer is set in step S453. Both the first bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) are cleared to “0” (off), thereby setting the rendering state to the first rendering mode # 1. Thus, in the low probability low base state, when the background designation command is transmitted, the effect state may change from the second effect mode # 2 to the first effect mode (“effect mode # 2 shown in FIG. 80). ”And“ low probability low base state ”to“ state transition corresponding to “random number SR11 = production end determination value data”).

  When the display of the probability variation state background HKD is designated by the background designation command transmitted after the end of the big hit gaming state, the determination of the presence designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67 and the background HKC in step S430 are performed. In response to the determination that it is not designated, the first bit (bit 1) of the rendering mode designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is set to “1” in step S434. By setting “(ON)”, the setting is made such that the production state is the second production mode # 2. Here, when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” ends, the setting for transmitting the third hit end designation command is performed in the post-hit opening process of step S116 shown in FIG. Done. Thereafter, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability low base state, a background designation command for designating display of the probability variation state background HKD is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. . In this way, when the game state becomes the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “surprise probability”, the production state becomes the second production mode # 2 (“big hit shown in FIG. 80”). State transition corresponding to “background HKD designation” from “game state end”). Further, in this case, the production state changes from the third production mode # 3 to the second production mode # 2 in response to the gaming state changing from the high accuracy high base state to the high accuracy low base state. Similarly, until the variable display result is “big hit”, the second effect mode # 2 is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect state is the fourth effect mode # 4 only when the gaming state is the high-accuracy base state. On the other hand, the effect state becomes the third effect mode # 3 when the gaming state becomes a highly accurate and high base state and when the gaming state becomes a low probability and high base state. Thus, 4th production mode # 4 respond | corresponds to being the game state containing the highly accurate state called the highly accurate high base state. On the other hand, the third performance mode # 3 is one of a gaming state that includes a highly accurate state such as a highly accurate and high base state and a gaming state that does not include a highly reliable state such as a low and highly accurate base state. It corresponds to that. In addition, the production state becomes the second production mode # 2 when the gaming state becomes the high probability low base state and when the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state. That is, the second performance mode # 2 is any one of a gaming state including a high probability state such as a high probability low base state and a gaming state not including a high probability state such as a low probability low base state. It corresponds.

  Then, after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped during the control of the fourth effect mode # 4 corresponding to the gaming state including the high-accuracy high-base state, the power supply is stopped. When the operation is resumed, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is a non-backup RAM that has not been backed up, or the initialization process is executed in step S401 shown in FIG. The stored contents of the buffer are initialized, and both the first bit (bit 1) and the zeroth bit (bit 0) are both “0” (off). At this time, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 executes a process for transmitting a power failure recovery designation command in step S32 shown in FIG. When the power failure recovery designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the power failure recovery screen display setting is performed and the recovery flag is set to the on state as shown in FIG. With the power failure recovery screen display setting, a power failure recovery screen as shown in FIG. 66 (B) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. This power failure recovery screen is continued until the power failure recovery designation command is transmitted in step S32 shown in FIG. 51 and the background designation command based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. 59 is transmitted. Then, it may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  On the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 restores the state of game control at the previous stop of power supply, for example, by executing the processes of steps S31 and S33 to S37 shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the high-accuracy base state is restored, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation state background HKB is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the determination that the restoration flag is turned on in step S421 in FIG. 67 and the background HKB designation determination in step S422, in the effect mode in step S423. By setting the first bit (bit 1) of the designated buffer to “1” (ON), the effect state is set to the third effect mode # 3. In this way, after the power supply is stopped during the control in the fourth effect mode # 4, the power supply is resumed, and in response to the background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKB, the high accuracy Control is made to the third effect mode # 3 corresponding to either the base state or the low-accuracy base state.

  During the control of the third effect mode # 3 corresponding to one of a gaming state including a high-probability state such as a high-accuracy high-base state and a gaming state not including a high-probability state such as a low-accuracy high-base state In addition, even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the power supply is resumed, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is a non-backup RAM that has not been backed up. The stored contents of the effect mode designation buffer are initialized by executing the initialization process in step S401 shown in 64. Both the first bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) are both “ 0 "(off). Also at this time, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 executes processing for transmitting a power failure recovery designation command in step S32 shown in FIG. In response to this, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 performs the power failure recovery screen display setting and sets the recovery flag to the ON state as shown in FIG. On the main board 11 side, after the CPU 103 restores the game control state at the previous power supply, the high-accuracy base state is restored based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. If the low-accuracy base state is restored, a background designation command for designating the display of the short-time state background HKC is transmitted. The

  In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the determination that the restoration flag is turned on in step S421 in FIG. 67 and the determination of the background HKB or the background HKC in step S422 in step S423. By setting the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer to “1” (ON), the effect state is set to the third effect mode # 3. Thus, after the power supply is stopped during the control in the third effect mode # 3, it corresponds to the background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation state background HKB or the short-time state background HKC based on the restart of the power supply. Thus, control is performed to the third effect mode # 3 corresponding to either the high-accuracy base state or the low-accuracy base state.

  During the control of the second effect mode # 2 corresponding to one of the gaming state including the high probability state of the high probability low base state and the gaming state not including the high probability state of the low probability low base state In addition, even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the power supply is resumed, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is a non-backup RAM that has not been backed up. The stored contents of the effect mode designation buffer are initialized by executing the initialization process in step S401 shown in 64. Both the first bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) are both “ 0 "(off). Also at this time, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 executes processing for transmitting a power failure recovery designation command in step S32 shown in FIG. In response to this, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 performs the power failure recovery screen display setting and sets the recovery flag to the ON state as shown in FIG. On the main board 11 side, after the CPU 103 restores the state of game control at the time of the previous power supply, the high-probability low-base state is restored based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. If it is, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation background HKD is transmitted.

  In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the restoration flag in step S421 in FIG. 67 is ON, and determines that neither the background HKB designation nor the background HKC designation in step S422, and Corresponding to the determination of the background HKD designation in step S424, by setting the 0th bit (bit 0) of the production mode designation buffer to “1” (ON) in step S425, the production state is changed to the second production. Set to mode # 2. Thus, after the power supply is stopped during the control of the second effect mode # 2, the background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKD is transmitted based on the restart of the power supply. It is possible to control to the second rendering mode # 2 corresponding to either the high accuracy low base state or the low accuracy low base state.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing transitions relating to the gaming state and the effect state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the end of the small hit gaming state. Here, if the variable display result is “small hit”, the processing of step S 296 shown in FIG. 60 is not executed, but the processing of steps S 118 to S 120 shown in FIG. 54 is executed, and the small hit end of step S 120 is completed. In the process, the game state designation buffer value is not changed. Thereby, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. Thereafter, the background designation command is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG.

  At this time, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the determination that there is the end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67 and the determination that it is the fourth hit end designation command in step S428. In Steps S436 to S438 shown in FIG. 68, it is determined whether or not the designation is other than the background HKA. If the background HKA is designated, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is set to “0” in step S439. By setting it to 1 ″ (ON), the effect state is set to the second effect mode # 2. Here, the display of the normal state background HKA is designated by the background designation command in which the gaming state is the low probability low base state and the production state is the second production mode # 2 or the first production mode # 1. This is the case (see FIG. 5B). Thus, after the end of the small hit gaming state, when the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state, the effect state corresponding to the subsequent transmission of the background designation command designating the display of the normal state background HKA Are set to the second effect mode # 2 (from “small game state” shown in FIG. 81 to “effect mode designation buffer value = 00/01” and “background HKA designation” state transition).

  On the other hand, in the case of designation other than the background HKA, the production mode designation buffer is not changed, and the production state before the small hit gaming state is continued. As an example, when the display of the probability variation state background HKB is designated by the background designation command, the effect mode designation buffer is not changed corresponding to the background HKB designation determination in step S436 shown in FIG. The display of the probability variation state background HKB is designated by the background designation command when the gaming state is the high probability and high base state and the production state is the third production mode # 3 or the fourth production mode # 4. (See FIG. 5B). Therefore, at the end of the small hit gaming state, both the first bit (bit 1) and the zeroth bit (bit 0) of the production mode designation buffer are set in response to the gaming state becoming a high-accuracy and high-base state. If it is “1” (on) and the effect state is the fourth effect mode # 4, the effect state is set to the fourth effect state even when the background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation state background HKB is transmitted thereafter. The effect mode # 4 is maintained (the state transition corresponding to “background HKB designation” and “effect mode designation buffer value = 11” from “end of small hit gaming state” shown in FIG. 81).

  In addition, at the end of the small hit gaming state, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is “1” (ON) and the 0th corresponding to the gaming state becoming the high-accuracy high-base state. If the bit (bit) is “0” (off) and the production state is the third production mode # 3, even when a background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKB is transmitted thereafter, The effect state is maintained in the third effect mode # 3 (state transition corresponding to “background HKB designation” and “effect mode designation buffer value = 10” from “small hit gaming state end” shown in FIG. 81). Thereafter, when the special figure game count value reaches the advantageous release end determination value in step S308 shown in FIG. 60, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability low base state in step S309. Subsequent to this, when a background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKD is transmitted, it is determined that there is no end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67, and the background HKD designation in step S454 shown in FIG. In response to the determination and the determination that the first bit (bit 1) of the read result in step S456 is “1” (ON), the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer in step S447. Is cleared to “0” (off) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is set to “1” (on), thereby setting the effect state to the second effect mode # 2. Thus, when the gaming state changes from the highly accurate high base state to the highly accurate low base state, the effect state changes from the third effect mode # 3 to the second effect mode # 2 (the “effect mode shown in FIG. 81). State transition corresponding to “background HKD designation” from “# 3” and “highly accurate base state”). Thereafter, the second presentation mode # 2 is continued until the variable display result is “big hit”.

  As another example of continuing the effect state before the small hit gaming state, when the display of the short time state background HKC is designated by the background designation command after the end of the small hit gaming state, step S437 shown in FIG. In response to the determination of the background HKC designation in, the effect mode designation buffer is not changed. The display of the short time state background HKC is designated by the background designation command when the gaming state is the low probability base state and the production state is the third production mode # 3 (FIG. 5B). reference). Accordingly, at the end of the small hit gaming state, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is “1” (ON) and the 0th corresponding to the gaming state being the low probability base state. If the bit (bit) is “0” (off) and the production state is the third production mode # 3, even when a background designation command for designating the display of the short-time state background HKC is transmitted thereafter, The effect state is maintained in the third effect mode # 3 (state transition corresponding to “background HKC designation” from “small hit gaming state end” shown in FIG. 81).

  Subsequently, when the gaming state changes from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, the rendering state is changed from the third rendering mode # 3 to the third rendering mode # 3 as in the case after the end of the big hit gaming state. 2 production mode # 2 (from “production mode # 3” and “low accuracy base state” shown in FIG. 81 to “background HKA designation” and “random number SR10 = production change decision value data”) State transition), the production state can be changed from the third production mode # 3 to the first production mode # 1 (from “production mode # 3” and “low-accuracy base state” shown in FIG. 81 to “background HKA”. State transition corresponding to “designation” and “random number SR10 = production end determination value data”). When the production state changes to the second production mode # 2 in response to the gaming state changing from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, as in the case after the end of the big hit gaming state. If the variable display count value reaches the effect end lottery execution value, it is determined whether or not to end the second effect mode # 2 every time the background designation command is transmitted. If it is determined that the random number SR11 matches the effect end determination value data and the second effect mode # 2 is ended (step S451 in FIG. 69; Yes), the effect mode designation buffer is set in step S453. By clearing both the first bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) to “0” (off), the rendering state is set to the first rendering mode # 1 (shown in FIG. 81). State transition corresponding to “random number SR11 = effect end determination value data” from “effect mode # 2” and “low probability low base state”).

  As another example of continuing the effect state before entering the small hit gaming state, when the display of the probable change state background HKD is designated by the background designation command after the end of the small hit gaming state, it is shown in FIG. Corresponding to the determination of the background HKD designation in step S438, the effect mode designation buffer is not changed. The display of the probability variation state background HKD is designated by the background designation command when the gaming state is the high probability low base state and the effect state is the second effect mode # 2 (FIG. 5B). reference). Therefore, after the end of the small hit gaming state, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is “0” (off) and the 0th corresponding to the gaming state being the high probability low base state. If the bit (bit) is “1” (on) and the production state is the second production mode # 2, even when a background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKD is transmitted thereafter, The effect state is maintained in the second effect mode # 2 (the state transition corresponding to “effect mode designation buffer value = 00/01” and “background HKD designation” from “small hit game state” shown in FIG. 81).

  Next, a specific example of the rendering operation in each of a plurality of types of rendering states will be described. In the following description, among the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4 described above as a plurality of types of effect states, the first effect mode # 1 is the “normal mode” and the second effect mode. Is the “侍 preparation mode”, the third effect mode # 3 is the “侍 mode”, and the fourth effect mode is the “true / 侍 mode”.

  For example, in response to the gaming state becoming either the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state after the big hit gaming state is ended, the production state is “侍 mode” which is the third production mode # 3. In this case (for example, the state transition corresponding to “background HKB designation” and “second hit completion designation” from “big hit gaming state end” shown in FIG. 80, or the state transition corresponding to “background HKC designation”), FIG. As shown in FIG. 82 (A), a notification image V10 is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display area to notify that the effect state such as “rush mode entry” is “侍 mode”. At this time, for example, the background image S3 corresponding to the “bamboo mode” such as “bamboo bamboo” based on blue is displayed. In addition, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, respectively.

  After notifying that the effect state is “侍 mode” in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. A notification image V1 that indicates that the mode is “mode” and a notification image V2 that indicates the remaining number of times of variable display in the “侍 mode” are displayed. At this time, a notification image V11 for notifying the content of the mission is displayed in the center of the display area, such as “If you kill 1,000 enemies, you ’re a big hit!”. Also, a notification image V3 for notifying a predetermined count value such as “0 person / 1000 people” is displayed on the upper right of the display area.

  Corresponding to the fact that the gaming state becomes a highly accurate base state after the end of the big hit gaming state, in the case where the rendering state becomes the “true / 侍 mode” which is the fourth rendering mode # 4 (for example, in FIG. State transition corresponding to “background HKB designation” and “first / third hit end designation” shown in FIG. 83A, and “true / 真” near the center of the display area as shown in FIG. A notification image V12 for notifying that the effect state such as “mode entry” is set to “true / 侍 mode” is displayed. At this time, for example, a background image S4 corresponding to the “true / dark mode” such as “bamboo bamboo” based on red is displayed. In addition, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, respectively.

  After notifying that the effect state is “true / 侍 mode” in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a notification image V4 that notifies that the “true / 侍 mode” is in the upper left of the display area. Is displayed. At this time, as in the case of the “saddle mode”, a notification image V11 for notifying the content of the mission is displayed in the center of the display area, such as “If you kill 1,000 enemies! Also, a notification image V3 for notifying a predetermined count value such as “0 person / 1000 people” is displayed on the upper right of the display area. Note that, for example, the presentation operation corresponding to the content of the mission, such as display of the notification image V11 or the notification image V3, is performed when the presentation state is the third presentation mode # 3 and when the presentation state is the fourth presentation mode # 4. In some cases, it may be performed only in one of the cases, or in any case, the rendering operation corresponding to the content of the mission is not performed. For example, the displayed background image differs depending on the rendering state. For example, it may be possible to recognize that the production state is different.

  FIG. 84 shows that, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes the low probability and high base state, and the gaming state is low after the rendering state is the third stage mode # 3 “侍 mode”. Corresponding to the certain low base state, the case where the production state is either the “侍 preparation mode” which is the second production mode # 2 or the “normal mode” which is the first production mode # 1 is shown. ing. In “侍 mode”, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), an effect image indicating that the character image CH10 cuts a person is displayed, and a notification displayed on the upper right of the display area every time a person is cut. The count value indicated by the image V3 is added. In the example shown in FIG. 84A, “300 people / 1000 people” are notified by the notification image V3.

  Further, when the remaining variable display count indicated by the notification image V2 displayed at the upper left of the display area is “0 remaining”, it is notified that it is the last variable display game in the “侍 mode”. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped and displayed with a fixed decorative symbol constituting a non-reach combination. When the variable display is finished, the “侍 mode” is finished.

  Then, when the “侍 preparation mode” is entered after the completion of the “終了 mode” (for example, the “random mode SR10 = effect change” from the “effect mode # 3” and the “low-accuracy base state” shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) State transition corresponding to “determined value data”, for example, as shown in FIG. 84C, a notification image for informing that the effect state is “侍 preparation mode” such as “侍 preparation mode” at the upper left of the display area. V5 is displayed. Further, for example, a background image HK2 of a display color corresponding to the “侍 preparation mode” such as “night mansion entrance” is displayed. On the other hand, when the “normal mode” is entered after the “claw mode” is completed, the notification image V5 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (D), for example, “daytime house entrance”. A background image HK1 having a display color corresponding to “normal mode” is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in the “侍 preparation mode” and “normal mode”. Will be displayed in the normal size in the center of the display area. It should be noted that the fact that the “侍 preparation mode” is set after the completion of the “侍 mode” corresponds to the fact that the gaming state becomes a highly accurate base state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the production state becomes “侍 mode”. This also occurs when the gaming state becomes a high probability low base state.

  After the “侍 preparation mode” ends when the gaming state is the low probability low base state, the production state becomes “normal mode” (for example, “production mode # 2” and “low” shown in FIGS. 80 and 81). State transition corresponding to “random number SR11 = production end determination value data” from “probable base state”). For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), after the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “claw preparation mode” in the same manner as in FIG. 84 (C), as shown in FIG. Assume that the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R for “middle” and “right”, and the variable display is finished. At this time, if it is determined that the “preparation mode” is ended and the “normal mode” is set, for example, “normal mode” such as “daytime house entrance” as shown in FIG. The background image HK1 of the displayed color is displayed.

  Next, a specific example of the rendering operation when the decorative display variable display is executed in the display area of the image display device 5 will be described. The effect control board 12 responds to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example, The control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in step S519 shown in FIG. 73, etc., so that “left”, “middle”, “right” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are used. In the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol is started.

  Hereinafter, a specific example in the case where the variable display result of the decorative design is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” will be described. FIG. 86 shows that the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the specific effect is not executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 86 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 86 is specified when the “slip” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 86E1 to 86E is executed, and when the non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern is specified, FIG. 86D1 to FIG. When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “Development Opportunities” as shown in FIGS. 86 (F1) to (F6) This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 86 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 86B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 27A in step S505 shown in FIG. 73, for example, left Corresponding to the determination of the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” as the final stopped symbol FZ1-1, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 86 (B) is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach”, the specific design is performed. Since the effect pattern is always determined to be only the slip TP1-1, and the “slide” specific effect is performed in the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R, the decorative symbol is quickly changed again. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display portion 5L are not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 27D in step S504 shown in FIG. Corresponding to the combination of the decorative symbols constituting HC6 determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, FZ1-6, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 86 (B) Will be done. When the “pseudo-ream” specific effect is executed, for example, the decorative design indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. By referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 35A in step S558 shown in FIG. 75 based on the stop symbol FZ1-1, the combination of decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is left middle right. Corresponding to the determination as the temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 86 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 86 (C1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R. ), And then stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” in the “medium” decorative symbol display portion 5C as shown in FIG. 86 (C2), and then the non-reach combination is obtained. The confirmed decorative symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the final decorative symbol shown in FIG. 27B is displayed in step S505 shown in FIG. 73 as the final decorative symbol which is stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R and the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C. By referring to the decision table 160B, or by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 27C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 28, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop It is determined as symbol FZ1-3.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, as an example, the number “7” is shown in the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R as shown in FIG. 86 (D1). After the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 86 (D2), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C (temporary stop display). ), The decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, after temporarily stopping display such as decorative fluctuation display, the decorative symbols may be changed again in all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as shown in FIG. 86 (D3). . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (D4) to (D6), the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 86 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portion 5R of “right” ( After the temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 86 (E2), the decorative symbol display unit 5R on the “right” causes the decorative symbol to be changed again at high speed. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (E1), the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R is, for example, the right final stop symbol FZ1- determined in step S505 shown in FIG. 2 is determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. 34A in step S558 shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (E4), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the “middle” decorative symbol display section 5C, the non-reach combination is confirmed. The decorative design is stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 86 (F1), a decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is displayed on the “right” decorative pattern display portion 5R. After the stop display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 86 (F2), the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C is also stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development opportunity eye HC6 are temporarily displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 86 (F4), the decorative design is displayed. An effect display is performed so that the player can expect that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 86 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development of the reach state occurs. In this example, the development that reaches the reach state does not occur, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (F5), after the effect display is performed so that the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols in the rotation state is restored. The confirmed decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 87 shows a display operation example when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a specific effect of “main notice” as shown in FIG. 87 is executed. In FIG. 87 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 87B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the portion 5R, and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the decorative symbol display portion 5C of “medium”. Note that the character image CH1 only needs to appear as an effect image in a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state later.

  Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), after the effect display is performed to update the decorative symbols temporarily displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L, the updated display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is “right”. In the decorative symbol display section 5R, update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is performed. In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), after the effect display that further updates the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R is performed, For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L, the updated display of the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is changed to the “right” decorative symbol. In the symbol display unit 5R, update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” is performed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are updated in accordance with the change of the character image CH1. After the effect display is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (H) to 87 (K), in the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L, the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily displayed. In the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display section 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (L), an effect display for updating the decorative symbol is performed, and then “3” as shown in FIG. 87 (M). A decorative symbol indicating the number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “main notice” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the confirmed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). .

  FIG. 88 shows a display operation example when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. For example, the variation pattern designation command is used to change the variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. When any one of them is designated, a specific effect of “main notice” as shown in FIG. 88 is executed. In the example of the display operation shown in FIG. 88, the same effect display as in FIGS. 87A to 87L is performed in the portions of FIGS. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (M), the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed, thereby the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed at. When the specific effect of “main notice” is thus completed, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a reach combination, a finalized decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  89 to 91 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 89 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 89B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L.

  When a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, for example, as shown in FIGS. 89 (C1) to (C3), “ By temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, changing the decorative symbols again on the “right” decorative symbol display portion 5R, and then stopping and displaying them. The effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Further, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-4, for example, as shown in FIGS. 89 (D1) to (D5), After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display that causes the decorative symbols to change again (pseudo continuous variation) on all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is displayed. Done. Thereafter, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the “left” and “right” decorative symbols display portions 5L and 5R. It reaches the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 89 (E1) to (E6). After all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R stop displaying (temporary stop display) a combination of decorative symbols that will become the development chance HC6, the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped are rotated in the direction of reversing. After such an effect display is performed, the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 89 (C3) and FIG. 89 (D5), for example, as shown in FIG. Decreases. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, “6” is displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C as shown in FIG. 89 (B). A “normal” reach effect that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) together with the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R having the numbers “left” and “right” is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 90B, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, for example, by displaying the decorative symbols other than the number “6” on the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. The variable display may be terminated. When any one of reach production α1 to reach production α3 or reach production β1 to reach production β3 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern at is increased again, and various reach effects are displayed. For example, in reach effect β1 and reach effect β2, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 90 (D) is displayed. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 90 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 90 (F) proceeds. To do. In the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), a decorative design that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first-stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (G), the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot combination is stopped in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols may be terminated. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. On the other hand, in the reach effect β3, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 90J is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display proceeds as shown in FIG. 90 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporarily stopped). A decorative pattern to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 91B, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed, and the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to finish the variable display of a decoration design. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 91B to 91D, the process proceeds to the third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. Here, for example, when it is decided not to execute the changing promotion effect in step S574 shown in FIG. 76, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is used as it is as the final stop symbol. Stopped display (final stop display) as a confirmed decorative pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 91 (F), FIG. 91 (G) As shown in FIG. 4, the left and right decorative patterns display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are changed again in a state where the same decorative patterns are aligned. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (H), the decorative design displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination. When the promotion failure effect during change is executed, after performing the change again of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 91 (G), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop-display a decorative design.

  FIG. 92 shows an example of a display operation when the sub-notice effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of special symbols in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display units are displayed. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Start fluctuation. Thereafter, for example, the information is read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided in step S517 shown in FIG. 73 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 decided in step S596 shown in FIG. According to the effect display control data and the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), an effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. Then, when the player operates the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 120 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is deleted as shown in FIG. 92 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L.

  FIG. 93 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 93 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 93 (B) to (D), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as the big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), an effect image for notifying the shift to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. Then, as an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 93 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 93, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply is resumed, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up. The stored contents of the effect mode designation buffer are initialized by being a backup RAM or by executing an initialization process in step S401 shown in FIG. 64. The first bit (bit 1) and the zeroth bit ( Both bits 0) are “0” (off). At this time, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 executes a process for transmitting a power failure recovery designation command in step S32 shown in FIG. When the power failure recovery designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the power failure recovery screen display setting is performed and the recovery flag is set to the on state as shown in FIG.

  On the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 restores the state of game control at the previous stop of power supply, for example, by executing the processes of steps S31 and S33 to S37 shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the high-accuracy base state is restored, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability variation state background HKB is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. On the other hand, when the low-accuracy base state is restored, a background designation command for designating display of the short-time state background HKC is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. . At this time, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S423 in response to the determination that the restoration flag is ON in step S421 in FIG. 67 and the background HKB / background HKC designation determination in step S422. By setting the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer to “1” (ON), the effect state is set to the third effect mode # 3.

  In this way, the probability change is made based on the fact that the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped during the control of the fourth effect mode # 4 corresponding to the gaming state including the high-accuracy high-base state. When a background designation command for designating the display of the state background HKB is transmitted, one of a gaming state including a high probability state such as a highly accurate and high base state and a gaming state not including a high probability state such as a low probability and high base state Control is made to the third effect mode # 3 corresponding to the above. Thereby, even if the power supply is stopped during the control of the fourth effect mode # 4 corresponding to the gaming state including the highly probable state, when the power supply is resumed, the gaming state including the highly probable state, Even if the memory of the effect state disappears due to the stop of the power supply by controlling to the third effect mode # 3 corresponding to one of the game states that do not include the high-accuracy state, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the production state and the production state appropriately.

  The third performance mode # 3 corresponds to a gaming state including a high base state such as a highly accurate high base state and a low accurate high base state. Then, after the power supply is stopped during the control of the third effect mode # 3, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKB or the short-time state background HKC is transmitted based on the restart of the power supply. If so, the third effect mode # 3 is controlled. Thereby, even if the power supply is stopped during the control of the third effect mode # 3 corresponding to the gaming state including the high base state, the control is switched to the third effect mode # 3 when the power supply is resumed. By doing so, even when the memory of the production state disappears due to the stop of the power supply, it is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the gaming state and the production state and to appropriately restore the production state.

  On the main board 11 side, after the CPU 103 restores the state of the game control at the time of the previous power supply, based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. 59, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted. Correspondingly, or in response to the start of variable display of a special figure game or a decorative design, a background designation command is transmitted. Thereby, after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, when the gaming state restoration process is executed in step S10 shown in FIG. 50 in response to the restart of the power supply, the main board 11 By reducing the number of commands transmitted to the effect control board 12, it is possible to reduce the control burden in the game state restoration process.

  When a power failure recovery designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, a power failure recovery screen display setting is performed as shown in FIG. With this power failure recovery screen display setting, a power failure recovery screen as shown in FIG. 66B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the background based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. It continues to be displayed until the specified command is transmitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production operation in the production state that is inconsistent with the game state from being performed until the background designation command is transmitted and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified on the production control board 12 side. The state can be properly recovered.

  For example, by transmitting an effect control command such as a first change start command or a second change start command, a change pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, Variable display start information that can specify which of the second start conditions is satisfied, variation pattern information for identifying a variation pattern of a decorative design, and determination results and setting results in steps S238 to S246 shown in FIG. Can be transmitted. Here, in a case where it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied with one effect control command together with the decorative pattern variation pattern, the first start condition and the second start condition Corresponding to the case where each is established, the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of decorative pattern variations must be prepared. For example, in order to be able to use the same variation pattern regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition, an effect control command that is twice the number of variation patterns of the decorative design must be prepared. I must. On the other hand, if an effect control command capable of specifying which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and an effect control command for specifying the variation pattern are prepared separately, the first start It is only necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the condition and the second start condition, and the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of variation patterns. Capacity etc. can be reduced.

  The CPU 120 for effect control performs the first hold display increase update setting in step S474 shown in FIG. 70, and performs the second hold display increase update setting in step S477, whereby the hold memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is set. If any one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, which is the starting opening winning designation command, has been normally received when the is received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the start winning memory display unit 5H, the first reserved memory number that is the number of stored data in the first special figure storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second on the basis of the establishment of the second start condition The second reserved memory number that is the number of stored hold data in the 2 special figure hold storage unit 151B can be displayed in an identifiable manner. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the progress of a game correctly.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a start opening prize designation command based on the setting in step S213 shown in FIG. 55, and then transmits a pending storage number notification command based on the transmission setting in step S214. Here, in the case where it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one production control command together with the total number of stored data that is the total number of stored data, for example, the total reservation When the upper limit value of the stored number is “8”, it is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. . On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  When a power failure restoration designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the restoration flag is set to the on state as shown in FIG. Then, in response to the determination that the restoration flag is turned on in step S471 shown in FIG. 70 when the pending control number notification command is received on the side of the production control board 12, in step S478 the start port The display update setting is performed when no prize is specified. With this start-up winning designation display setting, the start-winning memory display unit 5H has a predetermined display mode such as gray display as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Thereby, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted, the total number of stored data can be specified without being increased without increasing the types of commands to be transmitted. .

  In steps S201 and S202 of FIG. 55, the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure and the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure are set. Of these, it is determined by a common processing routine whether at least one of them has occurred. If it is determined in step S202 that at least one of the start conditions has occurred, in steps S203 to S215, a start time process for specifying which start condition is satisfied in the common processing routine is executed. The Thereby, the process when the first start condition is satisfied and the process when the second start condition is satisfied can be made common, and the program capacity can be reduced.

  In step S231 in FIG. 57, among the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure, It is determined by a common processing routine whether or not either one has occurred. If it is determined in step S231 that one of the start conditions has occurred, in steps S232 to S246, whether or not to control the big hit gaming state or whether to control to the high probability state in the common processing routine. For example, a pre-determining process for determining the value is executed. As a result, the processing when the first start condition is satisfied and the processing when the second start condition is satisfied can be shared, and the program capacity can be reduced.

  In steps S261 to S271 of FIG. 59, a first start condition for starting a special figure game using the first special figure and a second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure, Based on the fact that either one of them is established, a usage table for determining a variation pattern type from a plurality of types by a common processing routine is selected and set from a plurality of types of variation pattern type determination tables. To do. Thereafter, in steps S272 to S278, a pattern setting process for setting a special symbol or a decorative pattern variation pattern is executed in a common processing routine. In step S277, after the timer initial value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination result is set in the special figure fluctuation timer, the special symbol fluctuation processing in step S112 shown in FIG. 54 is executed. By updating the value of the figure variation timer, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. For the above, the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol is measured by the common special figure change timer. Thereby, when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, the process for setting the variation pattern is made common, and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is measured. By sharing a timer, the program capacity can be reduced.

  In step S238 shown in FIG. 57, by determining whether or not the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the jackpot decision value data, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as the jackpot gaming state as “big hit”. It is determined whether or not a variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the process of step S268 shown in FIG. 59, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed based on the determination that the big hit flag is OFF in step S261 in response to the determination result that the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not to reach a reach state. In the process of step S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of types based on the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, and the like. decide. Subsequently, in the process of step S276, based on the determination result in step S273, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. Thereafter, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 responds to a first change start command or a second change start command, a change pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11. 72, the decorative pattern variation setting process in step S161 and the decorative symbol variation process in step S162 are executed, so that various effect operations are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the determination result in step S276. Perform control to execute.

  Here, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 59, the step is performed using one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C set in step S270. By executing the process of S273, it is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types such as normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2 according to the reach state. To do. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set in step S268, the process of step S273 is performed using any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C set in step S271. By executing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CC1-3, etc. that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In addition, in response to the determination to reach the reach state in step S268 shown in FIG. 59, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S273, the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used to perform step S276. By executing the process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach” is determined. Further, it is determined that the reach state is not set in step S268 shown in FIG. 59, and the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect in step S273. In response to the determination, by executing the process of step S276 using the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance to execute a specific effect. Is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  In this way, even when the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “main notice”, and “end of development chance” can be executed, and various effects can be performed. In this way, it is possible to improve game entertainment. Further, in the processing of step S273 and step S276, depending on whether or not it is determined in step S268 that the reach state is set, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined using different determination tables, and the reach state is determined. The determination process does not compete between the case where it is set and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used for determining the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result whether or not to reach the reach state, Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the variation pattern can be the common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. As a result, the amount of processing in the process executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 (for example, the main random number value update process in step S55 shown in FIG. 52) is reduced, and the program The amount can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration by preventing the configuration of the random number circuit 104 from becoming complicated and increasing the storage area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the like. . Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing routine. In the processes of steps S275 and S276, regardless of the result of determination of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing routine. As a result, the amount of program can be reduced as compared with a case where determination is performed using a different processing routine according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 16A, the non-reach CA1-4 that executes a specific effect when the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured such that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type is low. As a result, when the number of stored data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol or decorative design is shortened, It is possible to reduce winnings in which the start condition is not satisfied.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design. Can be improved.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 11 (A) to 11 (F) and FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C), The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined. This makes it possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F and FIGS. 12A to 12C, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether or not the state is a certain variation state. Thereby, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, different types of performance operations can be executed, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In the first special symbol display device 4, a plurality of game balls are awarded based on the fact that the first start condition is established after the game ball has won the first start prize opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start condition is established. A special game that variably displays a special symbol to be the first special graphic of the type is executed. In the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting condition is satisfied, A special figure game is executed which variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of second special figures. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, in the special game using the first special figure or the second special figure on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display parts 5L, 5C, 5R. Corresponding to the variable display, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, the CPU 103 included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 follows a program read from the ROM 101, for example, a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process for controlling the progress is executed. On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control mounted on the effect control board 12 follows the program read from the ROM 121, for example, in the command analysis process in step S405 shown in FIG. 64 or the effect control process process in step S406, etc. The process for controlling the display state of is executed. Then, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition is determined, or the second starting condition is established. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure game using the second special diagram based on the determination is determined, the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Thus, after the variation pattern type is determined using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. By doing so, various rendering operations can be executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. On the other hand, even when a special symbol is variably displayed by a plurality of display devices such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display, the variation is changed. Numerical data indicating a common random value MR3 is used for pattern type determination. As a result, the processing amount in the processing (for example, the main-side random value updating processing in step S55 shown in FIG. 52) executed to update the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 is reduced, and the program amount is reduced. Can be planned.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11, the first winning designation receiving flag is off in step S472 shown in FIG. In step S478, in response to the determination that there is no reception, and in step S475, it is determined that the second winning designation receiving flag is off and the second start opening winning designation command is not received. Set the display update when the start opening is not specified. In this display update setting when no start opening prize is specified, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start winning memory display unit 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, gray display as shown in FIG. 71 (B). Thus, the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number cannot be specified. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the command transmission / reception operation that is performed to display the total number of reserved memories that is the total number of stored pending data.

  When it is determined in step S551, the process of S552 shown in FIG. 75 that the variation pattern is to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the specific effect pattern is changed to pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to pseudo-continuous TP2 in step S554. -3 in accordance with the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S517 of FIG. 73 in accordance with the decision to any one of −3, the temporary stop symbol determined in step S558, etc. Execute the process. Thus, based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R After all the decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is possible to execute a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the effect display changed again is performed a predetermined number of times. Then, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 59, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S270 for use in the determination in step S273. ~ 135C, any of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after executing the specific effect of "pseudo-continuous" Table data is configured so that it can be determined. In this way, for example, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” By determining the variation pattern type using the decision table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation unlike the design. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, for example, the CPU 103 opens the big prize opening in step S245 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the maximum number of times is set to “15”, the processing of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has set the maximum number of winning prize opening opening to “2” in step S245 shown in FIG. Then, the process is controlled to the two-round big hit state by executing the processes of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. Then, based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “surprising” in step S241 shown in FIG. 57, the big hit variation pattern type set in step S262 for use in the determination in step S273 shown in FIG. 59 is determined. In the tables 132D, 132H, and 132I, for example, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 variation pattern type is “accurate”. The table data is configured so as to include a variation pattern type different from the case of other than the above. In this way, when the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or the fluctuation pattern is different from that other than “surprise accuracy”. Despite being controlled in the round big hit state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by performing the same production operation as in the case of being controlled in the 15 round big hit state.

  Based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 executes the small hit release pre-processing in step S118 and the small hit open process in step S119 shown in FIG. In the same way as the two round big hit state, the variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. When the small hit gaming state ends, for example, in the small hit end processing of step S120 shown in FIG. 54, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed by not changing the gaming state designation buffer value. As a result, even when a gaming state that does not include a high-confidence state continues, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for being controlled to a gaming state that includes a high-probability state, and to improve the gaming interest. .

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 11 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 12 (B), and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. The table data is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is “ By becoming “surprise”, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for being controlled to a gaming state including a highly certain state and to improve the gaming interest. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine the common variation pattern type, so that the variable pattern can be determined Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types in steps S508 and S509 shown in FIG. 74, and FIG. 73 according to the determination result. The decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined in any one of steps S504, S505, S506, and step S510 shown in FIG. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of confirmed decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  The CPU 103 can specify the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board by executing the command control process of step S58 shown in FIG. 52 based on the transmission setting in step S280 shown in FIG. A variable display result notification command and a variation pattern designation command capable of specifying a variation pattern are transmitted. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, whether the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect operation that becomes a sub-notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols by executing the sub-notice setting process in step S 516 shown in FIG. 73. The determination of whether or not, and the effect operation that becomes the sub-notice effect is determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in step S593 shown in FIG. 77, the notice pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of kinds using the sub notice pattern type determination table 170 as shown in FIG. 39, and at this time, the notice patterns of notice CY1 to notice CY3 are determined. When one of the types is determined, one of the sub-notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C as shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is set in step S595, and then one of the plurality of kinds of notice patterns is selected in step S596. Decide on. Then, in response to the specific effect pattern determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the notice pattern, etc., the figure change control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined in step S517 shown in FIG. Then, the decorative symbol variation process in step S162 shown in FIG. 72 is executed. In this way, the CPU 103 or the like controls the progress of the game on the main board 11 side by performing determination, determination, setting, or the like for executing the sub-notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like mounted on the effect control board 12. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gaming entertainment by executing various production operations as sub-notice effects while preventing an increase in control burden for the game.

  In the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 39, the table data is configured so as not to execute the notice effect whose execution period overlaps with the specific effect, for example, when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. ing. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a plurality of types of performance operations from overlapping, and to prevent a decrease in performance effects due to the player's interest being dispersed.

  In the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 32C, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, the main effect buffer value is “1” to “3” depending on which of the previous effect buffer values is “1” to “3”. The specific effect pattern in the specific effect of the “main notice” executed last time is changed by assigning the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to each specific effect pattern of the notice TP3-1 to the main notice TP3-3. The table data is configured so as not to have the same specific production pattern. As a result, a variety of performance operations can be caused to appear without causing a bias, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the sub notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 39 and the sub notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. Thus, the table data is configured. As a result, even if the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, it is possible to execute the effect operation that becomes the sub-notice effect, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the reach state and improving the game entertainment be able to.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 42, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, the variation display state of the decorative symbol is a variation pattern in which the reach state is reached. The ratio of executing the sub-notice effect is lower than when the sub-notice effect is executed, and the ratio of executing the sub-notice effect is a variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and the specific pattern is not executed. The table data is configured to be high. This reduces the case where the decorative display variable display state does not become the reach state when the effect operation that becomes the sub-notice effect is executed, and the specific effect is not executed when the effect operation that becomes the sub-notice effect is executed. By further reducing the number of cases, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the player will reach a reach state when the sub-notice effect is performed, and to improve the gaming interest.

  The effect control CPU 120 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 in the decorative symbol variation processing of step S162 shown in FIG. 72, and corresponds to the operation detection signal being turned on. The effect operation in the sub-notice effect is changed by switching the notice effect control pattern. Thereby, the sub notice effect according to operation by a player is attained, and a game interest can be improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 73 based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and the like. By executing the processing of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in Fig. 74, the final decorative symbols that become the final stop symbols are displayed on the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Decide on. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S558 shown in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S576 shown in FIG. 76 to determine the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the changing promotion effect. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Deciding the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the plurality of decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R while preventing an increase in the control load for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side. Can do.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 75 when the specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, thereby combining the temporary stop symbols that become one of the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8. To decide. Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 75 to determine the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the specific effect of “slip”. . Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  In response to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the final stop symbol determining table 162A in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R other than the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C to be stopped are determined. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to determine the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display portion 5C where the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. By determining the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed with reference to 161, the combination of reach and jackpot is not achieved, and even if it is not the reach combination or jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B, sudden chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Determine the combination of finalized decorative symbols. Thereby, it can prevent giving a player a misunderstanding about whether a special effect is performed.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control is the “first probability variation” jackpot type that can execute the promotion effect during the change, the final decoration symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination in step S513 shown in FIG. 74 is displayed. decide. Then, in step S574 of FIG. 76, it is determined whether to execute the changing promotion effect by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. At this time, if it is determined that the changing promotion effect is to be executed, the decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to in step S576 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. The decoration design to be temporarily stopped by the promotion effect during change is determined. Thus, even when the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect is provided, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by enabling various performance operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game.

  When it is the “third probability variation” jackpot type that executes the jackpot promotion promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination in step S512 of FIG. . As a result, when the notification effect that the gaming state including the high probability state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started, the game state including the high probability state is controlled from the variable display result of the decorative symbols. This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not, enhances the effect of the notification effect, and improves the game entertainment.

  After the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type “fourth probability change”, the state transition corresponding to “background HKB designation” and “second hit end designation” shown in FIG. The gaming state is controlled to a highly accurate and high base state, and the effect state is the third effect mode # 3. Thereafter, when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times without the variable display result being “big hit”, the process of step S309 shown in FIG. Due to the state transition corresponding to “background HKD designation” from “production mode # 3” and “highly accurate high base state” shown in FIG. 80, the production state becomes the second production mode # 2. In addition, after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the “big hit” type “normal” ends, the state transition corresponding to “background HKC designation” from “big hit gaming state end” shown in FIG. And the effect state is the third effect mode # 3. Thereafter, when the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times without the variable display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being other than “surprise”, the process of step S309 shown in FIG. Ends and the low probability low base state is established. Thereafter, when a background designation command for designating the display of the background HKA is transmitted based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. 59, determination of no end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. In response to the determination of background HKA designation in step S441 shown in FIG. 69 and the determination that the first bit (bit 1) of the read result in step S443 is “1” (ON), steps S444 and S445 The determination is made as to whether the production state is set to the first production mode # 1 or the second production mode # 2. At this time, if the random value SR10 matches the effect change determination value data (step S445; Yes), settings for setting the effect state to the second effect mode # 2 are performed through steps S446 and S447.

  In this way, the production state is set to the second production mode # 2 when the high-accuracy high-base state ends and the high-accuracy low-base state ends, and when the low-accuracy high-base state ends. There is a case where it becomes a low probability low base state. As a result, even when the low-accuracy high-base state ends and the low-accuracy low-base state is reached, the player's expectation for the special gaming state such as the high-accuracy low-base state is increased, and the interest of the game is enhanced. It can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, after the production state is set to the second production mode # 2 in steps S446 and S447 shown in FIG. 69 according to the end of the low-accuracy base state, the variable display count value is drawn in the production end lottery in step S449. In response to having reached the execution value or more, in steps S450 and S451, it is determined whether or not to end the second effect mode # 2 and set the first effect mode # 1. If it is determined in step S451 that the random number SR11 matches the effect end determination value data, the effect state is set to the first effect mode # 1 in steps S452 and S453. Thereby, despite being controlled to the low probability low base state, the second rendering mode # 2 similar to the case of the high probability low base state continues for a long period of time, so that it is in the special gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation of the situation from decreasing.

  While the fourth performance mode # 4 corresponds to a gaming state including a high-accuracy state called a high-accuracy high-base state, the third production mode # 3 is a high-accuracy state called a high-accuracy high-base state. This corresponds to any one of a game state including a game state that does not include a high-accuracy state such as a low-probability high-base state. In response to the control to the high-accuracy base state after the big hit gaming state, the background designation command for designating the display of the background HKB based on the setting in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. Is transmitted, depending on the determination result in step S431 shown in FIG. 67, the effect state is set to the third effect mode # 3 in step S432, and the effect state is set to the fourth effect in step S433. It may be set to mode # 4. Thereby, when it becomes a highly accurate high base state after completion | finish of a big hit game state, it becomes possible to control to various production | presentation states, and the interest of a game can be improved. In addition, even in a gaming state that does not include a high-probability state such as a low-probability and low-base state, the third effect mode # 3 that corresponds to a gaming state that includes a high-probability state such as a high-probability and high-base state is achieved. By setting to, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the gaming state includes a highly probable state.

  When the low-accuracy base state ends and is controlled to the low-accuracy-low base state, the determination of no end designation data in step S426 shown in FIG. 67, the determination of the background HKA designation in step S441 shown in FIG. 69, and Corresponding to the determination that the first bit (bit 1) of the readout result in step S443 is “1” (ON), the rendering state is changed to the first rendering mode # 1 and the second rendering state by steps S444 and S445. Of which effect mode # 2 is set. Thus, when the low-probability low base state is controlled, the effect state can be set to either the first effect mode # 1 or the second effect mode # 2. Thereby, it becomes possible to control to various production | presentation states, and the interest of a game can be improved. Also, when the low-accuracy base state ends, the effect state is not always set to the second effect mode # 2, but may be set to the first effect mode # 1. On the other hand, when the high-accuracy high base state ends and becomes the high-accuracy low base state, the production state is always set to the second production mode # 2. By such setting, when the production state is the second production mode # 2, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the game state includes a high-accuracy state such as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  When the production state is set from the third production mode # 3 to the second production mode # 2 when the low-accuracy base state is ended and the low-accuracy low-base state is controlled, it is shown in FIG. Until the variable display count value reaches the effect end lottery execution value in step S449, the processes in steps S450 to S453 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the second production mode # 2 corresponding to the low probability low base state, the second production mode is continued until the number of executions of the special display game or the variable display of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined number. The decision to end # 2 is limited. Thereby, when it is in a low probability low base state, the fall of the game entertainment charm by 2nd production mode # 2 ending in a short period can be prevented.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, after executing the process for transmitting a power failure recovery designation command in step S32 shown in FIG. 51, based on the settings in step S251 of FIG. 57 or step S280 of FIG. In the above description, it is assumed that the background designation command is transmitted in response to the transmission of the image or in response to the start of the variable display of the special figure game or the decorative pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in response to transmitting the power failure recovery designation command, the background designation command is transmitted, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified on the side of the effect control board 12 You may be able to do it. As an example, in step S38 shown in FIG. 51, a background storage command may be transmitted along with a pending storage number notification command.

In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the two-round big hit state is controlled based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”. In step S327, by setting the first bit (bit 1) in the gaming state designation buffer to “1” (ON), the gaming state including the high probability state such as the high probability low base state and the high probability high base state is controlled. Explained as what to do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 includes table data that assigns the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination to the jackpot type “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” in accordance with the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may be. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the low accuracy high base state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “surprising accuracy”, the low probability low base state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped by executing the process of step S32 and the process of step S38 shown in FIG. The power failure recovery designation command for designating the display and the reserved memory count notification command for notifying the total reserved memory count have been described as being transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition to this, when the power supply is resumed, for example, a variable display result notification command based on the determination result of whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag after recovery is on, the stored value of the big hit type buffer, etc. May be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In this case, after displaying the power failure recovery screen in response to reception of the power failure recovery designation command, for example, the background corresponding to the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted by the setting in steps S250 and S251 shown in FIG. Decorative design corresponding to the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command during the period from when the specified command is sent until the demonstration screen display starts by the demonstration screen display setting Can be displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, after displaying the power failure recovery screen in response to the reception of the power failure recovery designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started based on the setting in step S280 shown in FIG. 59, the display of the image display device 5 is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols that are first displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen can be variably displayed when the power supply is stopped or before the power supply is stopped. It can correspond to the result. In addition, by sending a variable display result notification command at the time of power failure recovery in this way, variable display of decorative symbols that were being executed when power supply was stopped, and variable display of decorative symbols that were last executed before power supply was stopped The variable display result in can be specified.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the background designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the background designation as shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. By executing the process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can produce effects when the power failure is restored, after the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends, and in addition to the display of the demo screen or the start of variable display of decorative symbols. It was described as setting the state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in each process in the effect control process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, a part of the processes for setting the effect state is executed. It may be.

  As an example, in the fluctuation start command reception waiting process of step S160 shown in FIG. 72, for example, when a fluctuation start command or the like is received following the background designation command, the processes of steps S441 to S456 shown in FIG. 69 are executed. Thus, an effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set. Further, for example, when the background designation command is received together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set by executing the processing of steps S441 to S456 shown in FIG. When the background designation command is received together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the production state may not be set and the production state may be set only when variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In these cases, if no end designation data is received in step S426 shown in FIG. 67, the background designation process may be terminated.

  As another example, in the ending effect process of step S166 shown in FIG. 72, the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set based on a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. For example, in the ending effect process, it is determined whether or not the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode specifying buffer is “1” (ON) when the fourth per-end end specifying command is received. At this time, if the first bit (bit 1) is “0” (off), the 0th bit (bit 0) is set to “1” (on), thereby producing an effect after the end of the small hit gaming state. The state is set to be the second effect mode # 2. On the other hand, if the first bit (bit 1) is “1” (on), the effect mode designation buffer value is not changed, so that the effect state before the small hit gaming state (the third state) The effect mode # 3 or the fourth effect mode # 4) is maintained. When the second per-end designation command is received in the ending effect process, the 0th bit of the effect mode designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off), while the first per-end designation command is received. And the third per-end designation command are received, the 0th bit of the effect mode designation buffer is set to “1” (ON). Thereafter, when the background designation command is received for the first time after the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ends, if the background HKA or the background HKD display is designated by the background designation command, the effect mode designation buffer If 1 bit (bit 1) is cleared to “0” (off) while the display of background HKB or background HKC is specified, the first bit (bit 1) of the rendering mode specification buffer is set to “1”. "(On) can be set. When a fourth hit end designation command is received, a predetermined flag (for example, a small hit end designation flag) that makes it possible to specify the end of the small hit gaming state is set to an on state, while The contents of the mode designation buffer may not be changed. That is, different predetermined flags may be set to the ON state when the fourth per-end designation command is received and when the first per-end designation command or the third per-end designation command is received. . In this case, if the background designation command is received for the first time after the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ends, if the small hit end designation flag is on, it is determined whether or not the background HKA display is designated. If the background HKA display is designated, the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is cleared to "0" (off) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is set to "1" (on). ), The production state is set to be the second production mode # 2. On the other hand, if the small hit end designation flag is on and a display other than the background HKA is designated by the background designation command, the effect mode designation buffer value may not be changed.

  Alternatively, when it is determined in the ending effect process that the fourth per-end specifying command has been received, a determination result of whether or not the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode specifying buffer is “1” (ON). In accordance with the above-described setting, the setting based on the determination result of the effect mode specifying buffer value may be performed even when the first to third per end specifying commands are received. For example, if it is determined that the third end-of-end designation command has been received, it is determined whether or not the first bit (bit 1) of the effect mode designation buffer is “1” (ON). At this time, if the first bit (bit 1) is “1” (on), the game is in a gaming state including a high base state, and then the big hit type becomes 2 after hitting the two round big hit state corresponding to “surprise”. Corresponding to the end of the round big hit state, the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy base state. Therefore, both the first bit (bit 1) and the zeroth bit (bit 0) of the effect mode designation buffer are “1”. By setting to (ON), the production state may be set to the fourth production mode # 4. On the other hand, if the first bit (bit 1) is “0”, a game corresponding to the end of the round 2 big hit state after the game state including the low base state is changed to the round 2 big hit state Since the state becomes the high accuracy low base state, the first bit (bit 1) of the rendering mode designation buffer is cleared to “0” (off) and the 0th bit (bit 0) is set to “1” (on). ) To set the production state to the second production mode 2. Also, if it is determined in the ending effect process that the second per-end end designation command has been received, the start of the third effect mode # 3 is designated (FIG. 5D). See), the first bit (bit 1) of the production mode designation buffer is set to “1” (on), and the 0th bit (bit 0) is cleared to “0” (off), thereby producing the production state. May be set to be the third production mode # 3. Further, if it is determined in the ending effect process that the first per-end end designation command has been received, the start of the fourth effect mode # 4 is designated (FIG. 5D). (Refer)) By setting both the first bit (bit 1) and the 0th bit (bit 0) of the effect mode designation buffer to “1” (on), the effect state becomes the fourth effect mode # 4. Should be set.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, after the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished, the presentation state is changed to the first to fourth corresponding to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It demonstrated as what controls to any one of the production modes # 1- # 4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for changing the production mode, the type of the production mode, and the like may be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the timing of changing the production mode is when the big hit gaming state including the case where the big hit type is “surprise”, when the small hit gaming state is finished, after the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is finished. When the variable display of the special figure game or the decorative design is executed a predetermined number of times, the effect mode is changed in accordance with the lottery result in the lottery process performed every time the special display game or the variable display of the decorative design is executed. The timing may be any time when it is determined.

  As a specific example, unlike the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4 in the above embodiment, the first to third effect modes # 10 to # 12 as shown in FIG. You may make it provide as an effect state in the gaming machine 1. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the first performance mode # 10 corresponds to either the low probability low base state or the high accuracy low base state, and the second performance mode # 11 is the low probability high base state. This corresponds to one of the high-accuracy and high-base state, and the third presentation mode # 12 corresponds to the high-accuracy and high-base state. In addition, as the type of jackpot in the pachinko machine 1, “15 round jackpot” in which the number of rounds is “15” and “5 round jackpot” in which the number of rounds is “5” is executed. “Sudden probability change” in which the number of times is “twice” and the high-accuracy base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is ended, and “low probability high-base state is set after the big hit gaming state is completed in which the number of rounds is“ two ”. Suddenly short time ". Note that when the big hit type is “Suddenly Probable” or “Suddenly Short”, the big prize opening is open in the big hit gaming state compared to the “15 round big hit” or “5 round big hit”. It is only necessary to set the time to be shorter.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, when the play state is the first play mode # 10 in response to the gaming state being either the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state, the jackpot type is “ When controlled to a big hit gaming state corresponding to either “15 round big hit” or “5 round big hit”, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate high base state and the production state is the third production. Mode # 12 is entered (state transition corresponding to “15 round big hit / 5 round big hit” from “production mode # 10” and “low accuracy low base state / high accuracy low base state” shown in FIG. 94).

  Further, when the game state is the first production mode # 10 corresponding to one of the low probability low base state and the high probability high base state, the big hit type is “sudden probability change” and “ When the jackpot gaming state corresponding to one of the “sudden time reduction” is controlled, after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the gaming state is a high-accuracy base state (in the case of “sudden probability change”) and a low-accuracy base state ( In the case of “suddenly short time”, the production state becomes the second production mode # 11 (from “production mode # 10” and “low accuracy low base state / high accuracy low base state” shown in FIG. 94). State transition corresponding to “Sudden probability change / Sudden time reduction”).

  Corresponding to the game state being either the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state, when the production state is the second production mode # 11, the big hit types are “15 round big hit” and “5” When the jackpot gaming state corresponding to one of the “round jackpots” is controlled, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate high base state, and the rendering state becomes the third rendering mode # 12 (FIG. State transition corresponding to “15 round big hit / 5 round big hit” from “effect mode # 11” and “low accurate high base state / high accurate high base state” shown in FIG. 94). Further, when the game state is the low-accuracy base state or the high-accuracy-high base state and the production state is the second production mode # 11, the big hit type is “suddenly probable” or “ When the jackpot gaming state corresponding to one of the “sudden time reduction” is controlled, after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the gaming state is a high-accuracy base state (in the case of “sudden probability change”) and a low-accuracy base state ( In the case of “suddenly short time”, the production state becomes the second production mode # 11 (from “production mode # 11” and “low accuracy high base state / high accuracy high base state” shown in FIG. 94). State transition corresponding to “sudden probability change / short time”). Furthermore, the variable display result is “big hit” when the gaming state is the second effect mode # 11 in response to the gaming state being either the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state. When the number of executions of the special figure game reaches “78” without any change, the setting for ending the advantageous release control and the time reduction control in the high base state is performed, and the gaming state is changed to the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state. At the same time, the gaming state becomes the first effect mode # 10 (from “effect mode # 11” and “low accuracy high base state / high accuracy high base state” shown in FIG. 94 to “special game number of times = 78”. Corresponding state transition).

  Corresponding to the fact that the game state is the high probability high base state and the production state is the third production mode # 12, the big hit type corresponds to either “15 round big hit” or “5 round big hit” When the big hit gaming state is controlled, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state becomes the high-accuracy base state again, and the production state becomes the third production mode # 12 again (“production mode # shown in FIG. 94). State transition corresponding to “15 round jackpot / 5 round jackpot” from “12” and “highly accurate base state”). Corresponding to the fact that the game state is the high-probability high-base state and the production state is the third production mode # 12, the jackpot type corresponding to either “sudden probability change” or “sudden time reduction” When controlled by the state, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes either a high-accuracy high-base state (in the case of “sudden probability change”) or a low-accuracy high-base state (in the case of “suddenly short”) The effect state is the second effect mode # 11 (from “effect mode # 12” and “highly accurate base state” shown in FIG. 94 to state transition corresponding to “sudden probability change / short time reduction”).

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the game state and the effect state transition, the third effect mode # 12 is being controlled corresponding to the game state including the highly accurate state such as the highly accurate and high base state. When the background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKB is transmitted based on the restart of the power supply after the power supply is stopped, the gaming state including the high probability state of the high probability high base state and What is necessary is just to control to 2nd effect mode # 11 corresponding to being in any one of the game states which do not include the high probability state of the low probability high base state. Thereby, even if the power supply is stopped during the control of the third performance mode # 12 corresponding to the gaming state including the high probability state, when the power supply is resumed, the gaming state including the high probability state, Even if the memory of the effect state disappears due to the stop of the power supply by controlling to the second effect mode # 11 corresponding to one of the game states that do not include the high probability state, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the production state and the production state appropriately.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, the second presentation mode # 11 corresponds to a gaming state including a high base state such as a low probability high base state and a high probability high base state. Then, after the power supply is stopped during the control of the second effect mode # 11, a background designation command for designating the display of the probability change state background HKB or the short-time state background HKC is transmitted based on the restart of the power supply. If so, the second effect mode # 11 is controlled. Thereby, even if the power supply is stopped during the control of the second effect mode # 11 corresponding to the gaming state including the high base state, the control is switched to the second effect mode # 11 when the power supply is resumed. By doing so, even when the memory of the production state disappears due to the stop of the power supply, it is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the gaming state and the production state and to appropriately restore the production state.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the effect control process of step S406 together with the command analysis process of step S405 shown in FIG. The description has been given assuming that the production operation such as the variable display of the decorative design is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control of the production state and the control of the production operation are performed by a plurality of CPUs respectively mounted on a plurality of control boards provided for controlling the production operation. You may make it share and perform.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 95 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 140, a ROM 141, a RAM 142, a random number circuit 143, and an I / O 144 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 140 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 140 executes a program read from the ROM 141, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 140 reads fixed data from the ROM 141, the display control CPU 140 writes various variation data to the RAM 142 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 140 stores the RAM 142 in the RAM 142. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU 140 receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board 16 via I / O 144, display control CPU 140 I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O144 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 140 performs, for example, steps S160 to S166 shown in FIG. 72 based on a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. By executing the process, it is only necessary to control the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5 including the variable display of the decorative design. Alternatively, the display control CPU 140 may execute at least a part of the processes in steps S160 to S166 shown in FIG. For example, by performing the process of step S593 and the process of step S596 shown in FIG. 77, it is determined whether or not to perform an effect operation that becomes a sub-notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols, and an effect that becomes a sub-notice effect You may make it determine in any one of several types of operation | movement. Further, for example, among the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 73, the processing of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 74, the processing of step S558 shown in FIG. 75, and the processing of step S576 shown in FIG. By executing at least a part of the processing, all or part of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined. May be.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the processes of steps S421 to S456 shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 in the command analysis process of step S405 shown in FIG. The effect state may be controlled to any one of the first to fourth effect modes # 1 to # 4. The display control CPU 140 may execute any part of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above-described embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU and the like, but the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the processing executed by the CPU 120 for effect control in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type for the jackpot type of “surprise” The case where -1 is not assigned has been described. For this reason, variable display of decorative symbols by variation patterns classified into dedicated variation pattern types only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. May be performed in response to a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A, while a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Is not done in response to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. May be. In this case, depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the number of random number values MR2-1 for determining the big hit type assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” is varied. Thus, when determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition, and determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. Depending on the case, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “accurate” may be different. In this case, a decorative pattern with a variation pattern classified into a dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. May be displayed corresponding to a special game using either the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. . That is, when the variation special figure designation buffer value can be set to “surprise” corresponding to both “1” and “2”, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol A common variation pattern can be used when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. For the variation pattern type, if the table data of the variation pattern type determination table is configured to include a common variation pattern type when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. Good. As a result, when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, it is possible to determine a common variation pattern type. Regardless of which of the second start conditions is satisfied, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the variation patterns classified by the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. The table data has been described as being configured so that it can be determined as one of the types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table can be determined as any one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of a predetermined effect operation such as a specific effect of “Development Opportunity” and a promotion effect during change. Data may be configured.

  In the above embodiment, the start winning memory display unit 5H has been described as performing blue display when the first start condition is satisfied and displaying red when the second start condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a round symbol is displayed when the first starting condition is satisfied, and a triangular symbol is displayed when the second starting condition is satisfied. The symbol may be displayed. Alternatively, a number indicating the number of times each of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 32B in step S554 of FIG. 75, and the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3. In the above description, it is assumed that the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is set to any one of “1” to “3” depending on which one is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is determined when the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern in step S276 shown in FIG. It may be. In this case, a different special figure variation time can be set according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation. As described above, for the case where the special figure change time changes depending on the presence or absence of the production operation, the presence or type of the production operation is determined on the main board 11 side, and the special figure fluctuation time does not change depending on the presence or absence of the production operation. With respect to the effect control board 12, the presence / absence and type of the effect operation may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the sub-notice pattern type in step S593 shown in FIG. In the above description, the sub-notice pattern is determined including the presence / absence of the sub-notice effect when determining the sub-notice pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The presence / absence of the sub-notice effect and the determination of the sub-notice pattern type and the sub-notice pattern may all be determined in one process. The type of the sub-notice effect may be determined when the sub-notice effect is determined.

  In the above embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the reach combination in step S506 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols to be displayed are determined, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. It was explained that the difference in design was also determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the decorative symbol display unit 5C stops and displays the decorative symbols, and the left and right decorative symbol display units 5L and 5R display the stop symbols. For example, the CPU 103 may determine the design difference from the decorative design on the main board 11 side along with the determination of the variation pattern, and notify the effect control board 12 side by a predetermined effect control command.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S505 shown in FIG. 73, refer to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right outcome determination table 161. In the above description, the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the final decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display units are displayed. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  In the above embodiment, when executing the changing promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 as shown in FIG. 38 in step S576 shown in FIG. When the symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are determined so that the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become the determined decorative symbols that constitute the normal jackpot combination, the determined decorative A description has been given assuming that a normal symbol different from the symbol can be determined as a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become a fixed ornament symbol constituting a normal jackpot combination, the same normal symbol as the fixed ornament symbol However, it may be determined as a decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. As an example, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 169, any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 is displayed. In the case of the above, all of the random numbers SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect are assigned to any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” that are the same as the final stop symbol. The table data only needs to be configured so that the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are the same as the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. .

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 54, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value SR3 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  For example, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach variation pattern type determination table, the first start condition and the second Depending on which of the start conditions is satisfied, different allocation of the random value SR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type may be prepared in advance. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on SR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the common random number SR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the determination processing for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state, different processing is executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state is made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while numerical data indicating the reach determination random number value MR2-2. For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Further, for example, in place of the process in step S241 shown in FIG. 57 in the above embodiment, the process of determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types is performed when the first start condition is satisfied and the second start condition Different processing may be executed depending on whether or not is established. In this case, the processing for determining the jackpot type is different depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. As an example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S241 shown in FIG. 57, for example, whether the 0th bit (bit 0) of the gaming state designation buffer is “1” (ON) or “0”. By reading whether it is “off”, it is specified whether the high-accuracy high base state or the high-accuracy low base state is to be controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. At this time, if the read 0th bit (bit 0) is “0” (off), the high-accuracy and low-base state is controlled. Therefore, the variation pattern types of special CA 4-1, special CB 4-1, and special CC 4-1 are changed to the common variation pattern type when the big hit type is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”. decide. On the other hand, if the read 0th bit (bit 0) is “1” (on), the high-accuracy base state is controlled. Therefore, it is only necessary to determine the dedicated variation pattern type, such as special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2, when the big hit type is “probable”. Thus, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high hit low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display result is “ After the production operation common to the case of “small hit” is performed, the high-precision and low-base state is obtained. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high hit high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit type is “surprise” After the dedicated performance operation is performed only in the case of “ Thus, based on the decorative pattern variation pattern in the case of the 2 round big hit state, the player's sense of expectation of whether to enter the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the end of the two round big hit state It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in step S241 shown in FIG. 57 selects any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. Based on the determination, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 sets the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B in step S606 shown in FIG. 78, and step S608. In S609, it has been described that it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect. Then, when the jackpot type is any one of “normal”, “third probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation” based on the setting of the jackpot middle promotion promotion execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. While the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the jackpot promotion effect is not executed when the jackpot type is either “first probability change” or “second probability change”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect may be performed by the effect control CPU 120 regardless of the determination result in the CPU 103.

  In the embodiment described above, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the specific effect is executed in response to the fact that the variation pattern type is determined as the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It has been described as being determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7. That is, it has been described that the presence or absence of the specific effect is determined by determining the variation pattern type using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of the specific effect may be determined by determining the variation pattern using the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. As an example, the table data of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is set so that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3 include the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1. In this case, when the variation pattern type is determined as the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the presence / absence of the specific effect is not yet determined. First, it is determined that the specific effect is not executed by determining the non-reach PA1-1 based on the random value MR4 for determining the change pattern, while the change pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach. Execution of a specific effect is determined by being determined as one of PA1-7.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points. In the above embodiment, as an example of the gaming machine, the description has been given using the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a function of variably displaying special symbols and decorative symbols and a function of displaying various effect images. However, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, but can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... Display control board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121, 141 ... ROM
102, 122, 142 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124, 143... Random number circuits 105, 125, 144... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 140 ... Display control CPU

Claims (1)

A variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and a specific display in which the variable display result of the identification information is predetermined After the result, a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect operation in the gaming machine based on the command from the game control means,
The game control means includes
Whether to control to the specific gaming state and whether to control the gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended to a high probability state in which the probability of the specific display result is higher than the normal gaming state is variably displayed. A pre-determining means for determining before the result is derived and displayed
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state based on the determination by the prior determination means;
Backup storage means for storing the contents determined by the prior determination means and the control contents by the gaming state control means in a backupable manner even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
A recovery processing means for executing a recovery process of the control state based on the storage content of the backup storage means when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Command transmission means for transmitting a gaming state designation command capable of specifying the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means,
The production control means includes
The effect state in the gaming machine is a first effect state corresponding to the high probability state, and a second effect state corresponding to one of the high probability state and a game state other than the high probability state, and Effect state storage processing means for storing in the volatile storage means which effect state to control among a plurality of types including:
Effect state control means for controlling the effect state in the gaming machine to any one of a plurality of types based on the stored contents of the volatile storage means,
The command transmission means transmits the gaming state designation command in response to the variable display of the identification information being started after the recovery processing is executed by the recovery processing means,
The presentation state control means responds to the gaming state designation command based on the fact that power supply is resumed after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the control of the first presentation state. Control to the production state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images